EP1251395A1 - Silver halide photographic material and methine dye - Google Patents

Silver halide photographic material and methine dye Download PDF

Info

Publication number
EP1251395A1
EP1251395A1 EP01124350A EP01124350A EP1251395A1 EP 1251395 A1 EP1251395 A1 EP 1251395A1 EP 01124350 A EP01124350 A EP 01124350A EP 01124350 A EP01124350 A EP 01124350A EP 1251395 A1 EP1251395 A1 EP 1251395A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
group
ring
atom
substituted
condensed
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
EP01124350A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP1251395B1 (en
Inventor
Tetsuo Nakamura
Takanori Hioki
Katsuhisa Ohzeki
Naoyuki Hanaki
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2001118281A external-priority patent/JP2002023295A/en
Application filed by Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd filed Critical Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
Publication of EP1251395A1 publication Critical patent/EP1251395A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of EP1251395B1 publication Critical patent/EP1251395B1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/22Methine and polymethine dyes with an even number of CH groups
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/14Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups
    • G03C1/16Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups with one CH group
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/14Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups
    • G03C1/18Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups with three CH groups
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/127Methine and polymethine dyes the polymethine chain forming part of a carbocyclic ring
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/14Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/08Sensitivity-increasing substances
    • G03C1/10Organic substances
    • G03C1/12Methine and polymethine dyes
    • G03C1/14Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups
    • G03C1/20Methine and polymethine dyes with an odd number of CH groups with more than three CH groups

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a silver halide photographic material and more particularly relates to a silver halide photographic material which is high sensitive and generates less residual colors after processing.
  • sensitizing dye which is used for spectral sensitization exerts a great influence on the capabilities of a silver halide photographic material.
  • a trace of structural difference of a sensitizing dye largely affects photographic capabilities such as sensitivity, fog, storage stability and residual colors after processing.
  • Photographic performances are also largely influenced by the combined use of two or more kinds of sensitizing dyes but it is difficult to foresee its effect.
  • Many engineers have hitherto synthesized various kinds of sensitizing dyes, examined the combined use of sensitizing dyes and endeavored to investigate photographic capabilities thereof, however, it is not possible to know photographic capabilities in advance yet.
  • the present durability is deteriorated by adsorbing onto the surface of silver halide grains the sensitizing dye used for the spectral sensitization. Accordingly, a sensitizing dye in which the pressure durability is not deteriorated is desired.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a silver halide photographic material which is high speed and generates less residual colors after processing, and also is to provide a silver halide photographic material not deteriorating the pressure durability.
  • Examples of the 5-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y include a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a furan ring, an oxazole ring, an isooxazole ring, a thiophene ring, a thiazole ring, an isothiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a selenophene ring, a selenazole ring, an isoselenazole ring, a tellurophene ring, a tellurazole ring, and an isotellurazole ring
  • examples of the 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y include a pyridine ring, a pyridazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyran ring, and a thiopyran
  • Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring to form, e.g., an indole ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, or a thienothiophene ring.
  • the preferred 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y are a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, and a pyridine ring, and particularly preferred is a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring or a furan ring.
  • the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a sigle bond or a double bond. Particularly, a double bond is preferred.
  • the 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring represented by Z may be condensed with a carbocyclic ring such as a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, or a naphthalene ring, or a heterocyclic ring such as a pyrazine ring or a thiophene ring.
  • Z preferably represents an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a selenazole ring, an imidazole ring, a 2-pyridine ring, or a 4-pyridine ring.
  • Z more preferably represents an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyridine ring, still more preferably represents an oxazole ring or a thiazole ring, and particularly preferably a thiazole ring.
  • the alkyl group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 7, and particularly preferably from 1 to 4, carbon atoms (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl, octadecyl), and a substituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 7, and particularly preferably from 1 to 4, carbon atoms [examples of the substituents include, e.g., an aryl group having from 6 to 12 carbon atoms (e.g., phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-tolyl), an unsaturated hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms (e.g., vinyl), a carboxyl group, a sulfo group,
  • the aryl group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted aryl group having from 6 to 20, preferably from 6 to 15, and more preferably from 6 to 10, carbonatoms (e.g., phenyl, 1-naphthyl), and a substituted aryl group having from 6 to 26, preferably from 6 to 21, and more preferably from 6 to 16, carbon atoms
  • substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an arylthi
  • the heterocyclic group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having from 1 to 20, preferably from 1 to 15, and more preferably from 1 to 10, carbon atoms (e.g., pyrrole, furan, thiophene), and a substituted azole group having from 1 to 26, preferably 1 to 21, and more preferably 1 to 16, carbon atoms
  • substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an an arylthi
  • R preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl) , an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)), and more preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a
  • the methine group represented by L 1 or L 2 may have a substituent, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, etc.) , and an alkyl group (which
  • p preferably represents 0.
  • D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye, and every methine dye can be formed by D.
  • methine dyes include a cyanine dye, a merocyanine dye, a rhodacyanine dye, a trinuclear merocyanine dye, a holopolar dye, a hemicyanine dye, a styryl dye, etc. These dyes are described in detail in F.M. Harmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Cyanine Dyes and Related Compounds , John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1964), D.M. Sturmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Special Topics in Heterocyclic Chemistry , Chap. 18, Clause 14, pp. 482 to 515.
  • Formulae (XI), (XII) and (XIII) disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,340,694, columns 21 and 22 are preferred as general formulae of the cyanine, merocyanine and rhodacyanine dyes, respectively.
  • the numbers of n12, n15 n17 and n18 are not limited, and they may be an integer of 0 or more (preferably 4 or less).
  • M is included in the formula for showing the presence of cation or anion. It is depended on the substituent whether a dye is cation or anion, or the dye has a net ion charge or not.
  • Examples of the cation include inorganic ions such as a hydrogen ion, alkali metal ions (e.g., Na, K, and Li ions) and alkaline earth metal ions (e.g., Ca ion) , organic ions such as ammonium ions (e g., ammonium, tetraalkyl ammonium, pyridinium and ethylpyridinium ions) .
  • inorganic ions such as a hydrogen ion, alkali metal ions (e.g., Na, K, and Li ions) and alkaline earth metal ions (e.g., Ca ion)
  • organic ions such as ammonium ions (e g., ammonium, tetraalkyl ammonium, pyridinium and ethylpyridinium ions) .
  • anion may be either of inorganic and organic ions, and include halide ions (fluoride, chloride, bromide and iodide ions), substituted arylsulfonic acid ions (e.g., p-toluen sulfonic acid ion, p-chlorobenzene sulfonic acid ion) , aryldisulfonic acid ions (e.g., 1,3-benzene sulfonic acid ion, 2,6-naphthalenedisulfonic acid ion), alkyl sulfonic acid ions (e.g., methyl sulfuric acid ion), a sufonic acid ion, a thiocyanic acid ion, a perchloric acid ion, a tetrafluoroboric acid ion, a picric acid ion, an acetic acid ion, a trifluoromethane sulfonic acid
  • Examples of the preferred cation include a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a tetraehtylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion, an ethylpyridinium ion and a methylpyridinium ion.
  • Examples of the preferred anion include a perchloric acid, a iodide ion, a bromide ion, and a substituted arylsulfonic acid ion (e.g., p-toluen sulfonic acid ion).
  • m represents a number of 0 or more (preferably 0 to 4) necessary for balancing the charge in the molecule.
  • the number is 0.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by the following formula (IX), (X), (XI) or (XII): wherein Y, R, Z, L 1 , L 2 and p each has the same meaning as in formula (I) ; L 11 , L 12 , L 13 , L 14 and L 15 each represents a methine group; p 11 represents 0 or 1; n 11 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3; Y 11 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Y 11 may further be condensed with other carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; M 11 represents a counter ion; m 11 represents a number of from 0 to 4 necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; and R 11 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; wherein Y, R, Z, L 1 , L 2 and p each has the same
  • the 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring represented by Y 11 , Y 14 or Y 15 in formula (IX), (XI) or (XII) may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring.
  • carbocyclic ring a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring
  • heterocyclic ring a pyrazine ring and a thiophene ring can be exemplified.
  • the heterocyclic rings exemplified as the examples of Z 1 described later are preferably used.
  • Y 12 represents an atomic group necessary to form an acidic nucleus and any form of an acidic nucleus of general merocyanine dyes can be used.
  • An acidic nucleus used in the present invention is defined, for example, by T.H. James, The Theory of the Photographic Process , 4th Ed., p. 198, Macmillan (1977). Specifically, those disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,567,719, 3,575,869, 3,804,634, 3,837,862, 4,002,480, 4,925,777 and JP-A-3-167546 (the term "JP-A" as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application”)can be exemplified.
  • nuclei When an acidic nucleus forms a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring comprising carbon, nitrogen and chalcogen (typically, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium) atoms, the following nuclei can be exemplified: 2-pyrazolin-5-one, pyrazolidine-3,5-dione, imidazolin-5-one, hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-iminooxazolidin-4-one, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, isooxazolin-5-one, 2-thiazolin-4-one, thiazolidin-4-one, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, isorhodanine, indane-1,3-dione, thiophen-3-one, thiophen-3-one-1
  • Y 12 preferably represents hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, barbituric acid, and 2-thiobarbituric acid, more preferably hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, rhodanine, barbituric acid, and 2-thiobarbituric acid, and particularly preferably 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one and rhodanine.
  • the 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring formed by Y 13 or Y 16 is a heterocyclic ring obtained by eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from the heterocyclic ring formed by Y 12 , preferably eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, barbituric acid, or 2-thiobarbituric acid, more preferably eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, rhodanine, barbituric acid, or 2-thiobarbituric acid, and particularly preferably eliminating an
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 and R 16 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group, and examples of the substituents described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) are preferred.
  • L 11 , L 12 , L 13 , L 14 , L 15 , L 16 , L 17 , L 18 , L 19 , L 20 , L 21 , L 22 , L 23 , L 24 , L 25 , L 26 , L 27 , L 28 , L 29 , L 30 and L 31 each represents a methine group, and each methine group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an ary
  • L 11 to L 31 may form a ring together with other methine group, or may form a ring with Y 11 , Y 12 , Y 13 , Y 14 , Y 15 or Y 16 .
  • n 11 , n 12 , n 13 and n 15 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • n 14 and n 16 preferably represents 0 or 1, more preferably 0 .
  • n 11 , n 12 , n 13 , n 14 , n 15 and n 16 each represents 2 or more, a methine group is repeated but it is not necessary to be the same group.
  • p 11 , p 12 and p 13 each represents 0 or 1, preferably 0.
  • M 11 , M 12 , M 13 , M 14 , m 11 , m 12 , m 13 and m 14 each has the same meaning and the same content, as M and m in the methine dye represented by formula (I).
  • the condensed ring containing Y and Z in the methine dye represented by formula (I) is preferably selected from Y-1 to Y-26, provided that Y-1 to Y-26 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocylic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent. Of Y-1 to Y-26, Y-1 to Y-9 are particularly preferred.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by formula (II) or (III).
  • X 21 and X 22 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and particularly preferably X 21 and X 22 both represent sulfur atoms.
  • V 21 and V 22 may be linked to form a condensed ring, e.g., a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a naphthalene ring, or a thiophene ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • a condensed ring e.g., a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a naphthalene ring, or a thiophene ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • V 21 and V 22 a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred, but it is preferred that V 21 and V 22 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • V 21 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom.
  • V 22 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • the substituent represented by R is preferably a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and particularly preferably a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • X 23 and X 24 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and particularly preferably X 23 and X 24 both represent sulfur atoms.
  • V 23 and V 24 may be linked to form a condensed ring further, e.g., a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a naphthalene ring, or a thiophene ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • V 23 and V 24 a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred, but it is preferred that V 23 and V 24 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • X 23 represents a sulfur atom
  • V 23 is preferably not a phenyl group and V 24 is preferably not a methyl group.
  • V 24 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom.
  • V 23 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • the substituent represented by R is preferably a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and particularly preferably a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • Themethine dye representedby formula (II) is particularly preferably represented by formula (VII), and the methine dye represented by formula (III) is particularly preferably represented by formula (VIII).
  • X 31 and X 32 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • X 31 particularly preferably represents a sulfur atom.
  • V 31 and V 32 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • substituents represented by V 31 and V 32 each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamo
  • V 31 and V 32 a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred.
  • V 31 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom.
  • V 32 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • Y 31 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring.
  • the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y 31 each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • Y 31 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • the ring formed by Y 31 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • R 31 and R 32 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and each particularly preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • n 31 preferably represents 0 or 1.
  • the methine group represented by L 32 , L 33 and L 34 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonyl
  • L 32 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • n 31 represents 1
  • L 34 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • the substituents of L 33 include an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferred.
  • M 31 examples include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) .
  • Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • n 31 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 31 represents 0. m 31 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • a preferred combination is a combination in which X 31 represents a sulfur atom, X 32 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y 31 represents a benzene ring, V 32 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V 31 represents a hydrogen atom, R 31 and R 32 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n 31 represents 0, L 32 represents an unsubstituted methine group, M 31 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m 31 represents 0 or 1.
  • V 32 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom
  • R 31 or R 32 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • a preferred combination is a combination in which X 31 represents a sulfur atom, X 32 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y 31 represents a benzene ring, V 32 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V 31 represents a hydrogen atom, R 31 and R 32 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n 31 represents 1, L 32 and L 34 each represents an unsubstituted methine group, L 33 represents a methine group substituted with a methyl group or an ethyl group, M
  • V 32 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom
  • R 31 or R 32 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • X 33 and X 34 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • X 33 particularly preferably represents a sulfur atom.
  • V 33 and V 34 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • substituents represented by V 33 and V 34 each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamo
  • V 33 and V 34 a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred.
  • V 34 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom.
  • V 33 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • Y 32 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring.
  • the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y 32 each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • Y 32 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • the ring formed by Y 32 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • R 33 and R 34 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and each particularly preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • n 32 preferably represents 0 or 1.
  • the methine group represented by L 35 , L 36 and L 37 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonyl
  • L 35 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • L 37 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • the substituents of L 36 include an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferred.
  • M 33 examples include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) .
  • Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate andperchlorate ions.
  • m 33 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 33 represents 0.
  • m 33 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • a preferred combination is a combination in which X 33 represents a sulfur atom, X 34 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y 33 represents a benzene ring, V 33 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V 34 represents a hydrogen atom, R 33 and R 34 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n 32 represents 0, L 35 represents an unsubstituted methine group, M 32 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m 32 represents 0 or 1.
  • V 33 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom
  • R 33 or R 34 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • a preferred combination is a combination in which X 33 represents a sulfur atom, X 34 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y 33 represents a benzene ring, V 33 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V 34 represents a hydrogen atom, R 33 and R 34 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n 32 represents 1, L 35 and L 37 each represents an unsubstituted methine group, L 36 represents a methine group substituted with a methyl group or an ethyl group, M
  • V 33 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom
  • R 33 or R 34 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (I) is further preferably represented by formula (IV).
  • each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • Y 1 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • the ring formed by Y 1 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • the 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring formed by Z 1 may be condensed with a carbocyclic ring such as a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, or a naphthalene ring, or a heterocyclic ring such as a pyrazine ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • a carbocyclic ring such as a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, or a naphthalene ring
  • a heterocyclic ring such as a pyrazine ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • Preferred examples of the rings represented by Z 1 include a thiazoline ring, a thiazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, an oxazoline ring, an oxazole ring, abenzoxazole ring, a selenazoline ring, a selenazole ring, a benzoselenazole ring, a 3,3-dialkylindolenine ring (e.g., 3,3-dimethylindolenine), an imidazoline ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a 2-pyridine ring, a 4-pyridine ring, a 2-quinoline ring, a 4-quinoline ring, a 1-isoquinoline ring, a 3-isoquinoline ring, an imidazo[4,5-b]quinoxaline ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a tetrazol
  • a benzoxazole ring a benzothiazole ring, a benzimidazole ring and a quinoline ring
  • a benzoxazole ring and a benzothiazole ring a benzothiazole ring
  • a benzothiazole ring a benzothiazole ring
  • R 1 and R 2 each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • R 1 and R 2 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl), an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsul
  • R 3 preferably represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, particularly preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • Each methine group represented by L a , L b , L 3 , L 4 , L 5 , L 6 and L 7 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group
  • L a and L b each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • n 1 represents an integer of 0 or higher, preferably 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, more preferably 0, 1 or 2, and still more preferably 0 or 1.
  • p 1 represents 0 or 1, preferably 0.
  • M 1 examples include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) .
  • Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • n 1 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 1 represents 0. m 1 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (IV) it is preferred that at least one of the atomic group constituting the heterocyclic ring Y 1 (exclusive of the substituents on the ring) and X 1 contains an oxygen atom.
  • the X 1 moiety may form an oxazole ring, or the Y 1 moiety may form a furan ring, an oxazole ring, an isooxazole ring, or a pyran ring.
  • Preferred is the case in which the X 1 moiety forms an oxazole ring or the case in which the Y 1 moiety form a furan ring.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is used as a blue-sensitive dye
  • the methine dye is more preferably represented by formula (V).
  • X 3 and X 4 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • Y 4 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • the ring formed by Y 4 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably, pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • Y 4 may form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, preferably a benzene ring.
  • R 4 and R 5 each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • R 4 and R 5 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl) , an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl group).
  • M 2 examples include the same ions as described in M in themethine dye representedby formula (I).
  • Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • m 2 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 2 represents 0. m 2 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2.
  • a preferred combination in formula (V) is a combination in which X 3 and X 4 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y 3 represents a furan ring, Y 4 represents a furan ring, a thiophene ring or a benzene ring, R 4 and R 5 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, M 2 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m 2 represents 0 or 1, more preferably X 3 and X 4 each represents a sulfur atom, and R 4 and R 5 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • R 4 or R 5 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is used as a green-sensitive dye or a red-sensitive dye
  • the methine dye is more preferably represented by formula (VI).
  • X 5 and X 6 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, and preferably at least one represents an oxygen atom and the other represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • Y 5 or Y 6 may further form a condensed ring with other 5-or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • the ring formed by Y 5 or Y 6 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • Y 6 may form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, preferably a benzene ring.
  • R 6 and R 7 each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified.
  • R 6 and R 7 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl), an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl) , or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonyl)
  • a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton specifically, a
  • R 8 preferably represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • M 3 examples include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I).
  • Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • n 3 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 3 represents 0. m 3 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2.
  • a preferred combination in formula (VI) is a combination in which either of X 5 or X 6 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom, Y 5 represents a furan ring or a thiophene ring, Y 6 represents a furan ring, a thiophene ring or a benzene ring, R 6 and R 7 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, R 8 represents a methyl group or an ethyl group, M 3 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m 3 represents 1, particularly preferably Y 5 represents a thiophene ring, Y 6 represents a benzene ring, and R 6 and R 7 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobut
  • R 6 or R 7 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • Y preferably represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent.
  • the thiophene ring may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and the case where the thiophene ring is substituted with at least one substituent is preferred.
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl, trifluoromethyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., methoxy
  • an alkylthio group e.g., methylthio
  • a cyano group e.g., an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine)
  • the more preferred substituents are an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., methyl,
  • D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye, preferably a group to form a cyanine dye, and more preferably to form a dye represented by the above formula (IX).
  • Y which represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring
  • Z the rings including Z: wherein Xa represents an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (N-Rw).
  • the furan ring or pyrrole ring moiety may further be substituted, or may be condensed with a ring.
  • the preferred is the case where the furan ring or pyrrole ring moiety is substituted with a monovalent substituent.
  • (1a) and (1b) the case where only one monovalent substituent substitutes on the carbon atom contiguous to Xa is preferred.
  • (1c) the case where one monovalent substituent substitutes on at least either one carbon atom contiguous to Xa is preferred.
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., methoxy
  • an alkylthio group e.g., methylthio
  • a cyano group e.g., an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g.
  • fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine are exemplified, the more preferred substituents are a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, the still more preferred is a halogen atom, the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and the most preferred is a chlorine atom.
  • Rw represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, a substituted alkyl group or an unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • the substituents of the substituted alkyl group are preferably substituents having higher hydrophilicity than an iodine atom, more preferably substituents having the same or higher hydrophilicity than a chlorine atom, and particularly preferably substituents having the same or higher hydrophilicity than a fluorine atom.
  • Rw more preferably represents a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the thiophene ring moiety may further be substituted, provided that the thiophene ring moiety is substituted with at least one substituent.
  • the case where only one monovalent substituent substitutes on the carbon atom contiguous to the S atom is preferred.
  • the case where one monovalent substituent substitutes on at least either one carbon atom contiguous to the S atom is preferred.
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., methoxy
  • an alkylthio group e.g., methylthio
  • a cyano group an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl)
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • the more preferred substituents are a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group and a halogen atom
  • the still more preferred are a cyano group and a halogen atom
  • the still further preferred is a halogen atom
  • the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom
  • the most preferred is
  • (2a), (2b) and (2c) are preferred.
  • a cyanine dye represented by formula (IX) is formed by D, and at this time, the case where at least one of R and R 11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is preferred, and the case where both R and R 11 represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred.
  • An acid racial is described below.
  • An acid racial is a group having a dissociable proton.
  • a sulfo group a carboxyl group, a sulfato group, a -CONHSO 2 - group (sulfonylcarbamoyl, carbonylsulfamoyl), a -CONHCO- group (carbonylcarbamoyl), an -SO 2 NHSO 2 - group (sulfonylsulfamoyl), a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a phosphato group, a phosphono group, a phoronic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group which dissociable protons by their pKa and the ambient pH can be exemplified.
  • proton-dissociable groups capable of dissociating 90% or more protons at pH 5 to 11 are preferred.
  • Preferred alkyl group ⁇ Qa ⁇ T 1 T 1 :
  • Qa may be any group so long as it satisfies the above condition, preferably comprised of an atom or an atomic group containing at least one of a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom and an oxygen atom.
  • Qa preferably represents a linking group having from 0 to 10, preferably from 1 to 8, more preferably from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, consisting in combination of one or more of an alkylene group (e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, methyltrimethylene), an alkenylene group (e.g., ethenylene, propenylene), an alkynylene group (e.g., ethynylene, propynylene), an amido group, an ester group, a sulfoamido group, a sulfonic ester group, a ureido group, a sulfonyl group, a sulf
  • linking groups may further be substituted, or may contain a ring (e.g., an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring).
  • linking groups do not contain a hetero ring and that they are not substituted.
  • Qa represents a divalent linking group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms consisting in combination of one or more of an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, methyltrimethylene), an alkenylene group having from 2 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., ethenylene, propenylene), and an alkynylene group having from 2 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., ethynylene, propynylene) , and particularly preferably an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms (preferably, e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene).
  • an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene
  • an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms e.g., methylene
  • T 1 represents a sulfo group
  • Qa more preferably represents ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, or methyltrimethylene, and particularly preferably trimethylene.
  • T 1 represents a carboxyl group
  • Qa more preferably represents methylene, ethylene, or trimethylene, and particularly preferably methylene.
  • Qa more preferably represents methylene, ethylene, or trimethylene, and particularly preferably methylene.
  • Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd each represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, or an amino group, and the following groups can be preferably exemplified.
  • Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd each more preferably represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a hydroxyethyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • carboxyl groups and dissociable nitrogen atoms may be described in a form not dissociated (e.g., COOH, NH) or may be described in a dissociated form (e.g., COO - , N - ).
  • a dissociable group practically becomes a dissociating state or a non-dissociating state depending upon the atmosphere such as pH in which the dye is present.
  • a cation When a cation is present as the counter ion, it may be described as, e.g., (COO - , Na + ), (N - , Na + ). In a non-dissociated state, it is described as (COOH), (NH), but regarding a cationic compound of the counter ion as a proton, it can also be described as (COO - , H + ), (N - , H + ).
  • the case where at least one of R and R 11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred, and the case where one of R and R 11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred.
  • the preferred alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group are alkyl groups substituted with a carboxyl group, a -CONHSO 2 - group, an -SO 2 NHCO- group, a -CONHCO- group or an -SO 2 NHSO 2 - group.
  • the preferred alkyl groups having a sulfo group are a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group and a 2-sulfoethyl group, and the more preferred alkyl group is a 3-sulfopropyl group.
  • the preferred alkyl groups having an acid radical other than a sulfo group a carboxymethyl group and a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group are particularly preferred.
  • R and R 11 is the case where either one represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and the other represents a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group or a 2-sulfoethyl group, and the more preferred combination is the case where either one represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and the other represents a 3-sulfopropyl group.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by formula (XX) or (XXX).
  • Y 51 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y 51 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • a dye having a furan ring or a pyrrole ring as represented by formula (XX) has particularly excellent photographic performances.
  • Y 51 which represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring are shown below together with the rings including X 51 : wherein Xa has the same meaning as Xa in the above formulae (1a) , (1b) and (1c), which represents an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (N-Rw) and the similar ones are preferred.
  • Va, Vb, Vc and Vd each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, Va and Vb may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and Va and Vb preferably represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • Va and Vb preferably represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • Va represents a monovalent substituent and Vb represents a hydrogen atom is preferred.
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., methoxy
  • an alkylthio group e.g., methylthio
  • a cyano group an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom
  • the more preferred substituents are a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom
  • the still more preferred is a halogen atom
  • the particularly preferred are a
  • (3a), (3b) and (3c) are preferred.
  • X 51 and X 52 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom.
  • the nitrogen atom can be preferably expressed by -N (Rx) - and the carbon atomby -C (Ry) (Rz) -, wherein Rx, Ry andRz each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably the same alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group as represented by R, more preferably the alkyl group.
  • X 51 and X 52 each preferably represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, and more preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • Y 52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y 52 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • Y 52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and as the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y 52 , the heterocyclic rings described in Y in the methine dye represented by formula (I) above can be exemplified, which may further form a condensed ring together with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred that a third condensed ring should not be present.
  • Y 52 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, or a thiophene ring (as the pyrrole, furan and thiophene rings, the above-described (1a), (1b), (1c), (2a), (2b), (2c), (3a), (3b), (3c) and the later-described (4a), (4b) and (4c) can be exemplified and the similar ones are preferred), particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and most preferably a benzene ring.
  • the substituents are not limited but preferably an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl) , an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl) , an alkoxyl group (e.g.
  • halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • a halogen atom particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R 51 and R 52 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group.
  • R 51 and R 52 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical
  • the case where R 51 and R 52 both represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred
  • the case where at least one of R 51 and R 52 , which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group
  • the case where one of R 51 and R 52 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred.
  • L 51 , L 52 and L 53 each represents a methine group, which may be a substituted or unsubstituted methine group, and each has the same meaning as L 11 , L 12 and L 13 described above.
  • n 51 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • L 52 and L 53 are repeated but they may be or may not be the same.
  • L 51 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 51 and L 53 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 52 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl).
  • L 52 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group.
  • M 51 represents a counter ion and has the same meaning as M described above.
  • the preferred examples of cations include a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a tetraethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion, an ethylpyridinium ion and a methylpyridinium ion.
  • the preferred examples of anions include a perchloric acid ion, an iodide ion, a bromide ion, a substituted arylsulfonic acid ion (e.g., p-toluenesulfonic acid ion).
  • m 51 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m 51 represents 0. m 51 preferably represents a number of from 0 to 4.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XX) is more preferably represented by the following formula (XXI).
  • Y 71 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y 71 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond.
  • X 71 and X 72 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom.
  • R 71 and R 72 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group.
  • L 71 , L 72 and L 73 each represents a methine group.
  • n 71 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
  • M 71 represents a counter ion, and
  • m 71 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • V 71 , V 72 , V 73 and V 74 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Y 71 has the same meaning as Y 51 described above, and the similar ones are preferred, and two carbon atoms to which Y 71 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • X 71 and X 72 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, each has the same meaning as X 51 and X 52 described above, and the similar ones are preferred.
  • R 71 and R 72 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, each has the same meaning as R 51 and R 52 described above, and the similar ones are preferred.
  • L 71 , L 72 and L 73 each represents a methine group, each has the same meaning as L 51 , L 52 and L 53 described above, and the similar ones are preferred.
  • n 71 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • n71 - represents the following LLa or LLb is particularly preferred.
  • M 71 represents a counter ion, and m 71 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M 71 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V 71 , V 72 , V 73 and V 74 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring.
  • V 71 and V 74 represent a hydrogen atom
  • V 72 and V 73 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) .
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., meth
  • V 72 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V 73 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a red-sensitive emulsion layer
  • the methine chain (L 71 , L 72 , L 73 , n 71 ) represents the above-described LLb (wherein Apreferably represents an ethyl group) , either X 71 or X 72 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom, and Y 71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • R 71 and R 72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V 71 , V 72 and V 74 represent a hydrogen atom, V 73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a green-sensitive emulsion layer
  • the methine chain (L 71 , L 72 , L 73 , n 71 ) represents the above-described LLb (wherein A preferably represents an ethyl group), both of X 71 and X 72 represent an oxygen atom, and Y 71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • R 71 and R 72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V 71 , V 72 and V 74 represent a hydrogen atom, V 73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 2-thienyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl) , or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a halogen
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a blue-sensitive emulsion layer
  • the methine chain (L 71 , L 72 , L 73 , n 71 ) represents the above-described LLa
  • both of X 71 and X 72 represent a sulfur atom
  • Y 71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • R 71 and R 72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V 71 , V 72 and V 74 represent a hydrogen atom, V 73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly
  • Y 61 represents a thiophene ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one halogen atom, and two carbon atoms to which Y 61 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • a dye having a thiophene ring substituted with at least one halogen atom as represented by formula (XXX) has particularly excellent photographic performances.
  • Y 61 which represents a thiophene are shown below together with the rings including X 61 : wherein Ve, Vf, Vg and Vh each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, provided that at least one of Ve and Vf and at least one of Vg and Vh each represents a halogen atom.
  • Ve represents a halogen atom
  • Vf represents a hydrogen atom.
  • at least one of Vg and Vh is substituted with a halogen atom.
  • halogen atom a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom is preferred, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom is more preferred and a chlorine atom is particularly preferred.
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., methoxy
  • an alkylthio group e.g., methylthio
  • a cyano group e.g., an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl)
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • (4a), (4b) and (4c) are preferred.
  • X 61 and X 62 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom.
  • the nitrogen atom can be preferably expressed by -N (Rx) - and the carbon atomby-C (Ry) (Rz) -, wherein Rx, Ry andRz each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably the same alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group as represented by R, more preferably the alkyl group.
  • X 61 and X 62 each preferably represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, and more preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • Y 62 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y 62 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • Y 62 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and as the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y 62 , the heterocyclic rings described in Y in the methine dye represented by formula (I) above can be exemplified, which may further form a condensed ring together with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred that a third condensed ring should not be present.
  • Y 62 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, or a thiophene ring (as the pyrrole, furan and thiophene rings, the above-described (1a), (1b), (1c), (2a), (2b), (2c), (3a), (3b), (3c), (4a), (4b) and (4c) can be exemplified and the similar ones are preferred), particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and most preferably a benzene ring.
  • the substituents are not limited but preferably an alkyl group (e.g., methyl) , an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R 61 and R 62 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group.
  • R and R 11 the case where at least one of R 61 and R 62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is preferred, the case where R 61 and R 62 both represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred, the case where at least one of R 61 and R 62 , which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical, represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred, and the case where one of R 61 and R 62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred.
  • L 61 , L 62 and L 63 each represents a methine group, and each has the same meaning as L 51 , L 52 and L 53 described above.
  • n 61 represents 0 or 1, preferably 1.
  • L 61 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 61 and L 63 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 62 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl).
  • L 62 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group.
  • M 61 represents a counter ion
  • m 61 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is preferably represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII).
  • V 61 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom.
  • Y 61 , X 61 , X 62 , Y 62 , R 61 , R 62 , L 61 , L 62 , L 63 , n 61 , M 61 and m 61 each has the same meaning as defined in formula (XXX) and the similar ones are preferred.
  • L 61 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 61 and L 63 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group
  • L 62 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl).
  • L 62 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) is preferably represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIb).
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXXII) is preferably represented by formula (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb), more preferably formula (XXXIIb).
  • V 85 represents a halogen atom
  • X 81 and X 82 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • R 81 and R 82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical
  • V 81 , V 82 , V 83 and V 84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • M 81 represents a counter ion
  • m 81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • V 85 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom.
  • a halogen atom e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine
  • R 81 and R 82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical.
  • R and R 11 the case where at least one of R 81 and R 82 , which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical, represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is preferred, and the case where one of R 81 and R 82 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group (preferably a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group) and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is more preferred.
  • R 81 and R 82 represent a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group
  • R 81 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group
  • R 81 represents a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group
  • M 81 represents a counter ion, and m 81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M 81 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V 81 , V 82 , V 83 and V 84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring.
  • V 81 and V 84 represent a hydrogen atom
  • V 82 and V 83 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) .
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., me
  • V 82 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V 83 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • V 95 represents a halogen atom
  • X 91 and X 92 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • R 91 and R 92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group
  • a 91 represents amethyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group
  • V 91 , V 92 , V 93 and V 94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • M 91 represents a counter ion
  • m 91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • V 95 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R 91 and R 92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, each has the same meaning as R 61 and R 62 described above, and the similar ones are preferred.
  • a 91 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group, preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and particularly preferably an ethyl group.
  • M 91 represents a counter ion, and m 91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M 91 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V 91 , V 92 , V 93 and V 94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring.
  • V 91 and V 94 represent a hydrogen atom
  • V 92 and V 93 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) .
  • an alkyl group e.g., methyl
  • an aryl group e.g., phenyl
  • an aromatic heterocyclic group e.g., 1-pyrrolyl
  • an alkoxyl group e.g., me
  • V 92 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V 93 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a red-sensitive emulsion layer
  • the dye is represented by formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb) (A 91 preferably represents an ethyl group)
  • X 91 or X 92 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom
  • V 95 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • R 91 and R 92 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V 91 , V 92 and V 94 represent a hydrogen atom, V 93 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a green-sensitive emulsion layer
  • the dye is represented by formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb) (A 91 preferably represents an ethyl group)
  • both of X 91 and X 92 represent an oxygen atom
  • V 95 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • R 91 and R 92 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V 91 , V 92 and V 94 represent a hydrogen atom, V 93 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly
  • the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a blue-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the dye is represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa), both of X 81 and X 82 represent a sulfur atom, and V 85 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • Formula (XXXIa) is preferred to (XXXIIa).
  • R 81 and R 82 each preferably represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, more preferably either R 81 or R 82 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group, still more preferably either R 81 or R 82 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, particularly preferably R 81 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and most preferably R 81 represents a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • V 81 , V 82 and V 84 represent a hydrogen atom
  • V 83 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom
  • M 81 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation
  • m 81 represents 0 or
  • sensitizing dyes which are less in residual colors are poor in J-associative property and low in sensitivity, but the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are remarkably high in J-associative property and high in sensitivity, although they generate less residual colors.
  • the methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III), (IV), (V) , (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) for use in the present invention can be synthesized according to the methods described in the following literature.
  • the methine dyes represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) , (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention may be directly dispersed in the emulsion, or they may be dissolved in water, a single or mixed solvent of methanol, ethanol, propanol, acetone, methyl cellosolve, 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropanol, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, 3-methoxy-1-propanol, 3-methoxy-1-butanol, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, etc., and then added to the emulsion.
  • various methods can be used for incorporating dyes into the emulsion, for example, a method in which dyes are dissolved in a volatile organic solvent, the solution is dispersed in water or hydrophilic colloid and this dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in U.S.
  • Patent 3,469,987 a method in which water-insoluble dyes are dispersed in a water-soluble solvent without being dissolved and this dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-B-46-24185 (the term "JP-B” as used herein means an "examined Japanese patent publication"), a method in which dyes are dissolved in acid and this solution is added to the emulsion, or dyes are added to the emulsion as an aqueous solution coexisting with acid or base as disclosed in JP-B-44-23389, JP-B-44-27555 and JP-B-57-22091, a method in which dyes are added to the emulsion as an aqueous solution or a colloidal dispersion coexisting with a surfactant as disclosed in U.S.
  • Patents 3,822,135 and 4,006,026, a method in which dyes are directly dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid and the dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-A-53-102733 and JP-A-58-105141, or a method in which dyes are dissolved using a compound capable of red-shifting and the solution is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-A-51-74624 can be used. Further, ultrasonic waves can also be used for dissolution.
  • the time of the addition of the methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI) , (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention to the silver halide emulsion of the present invention may be at any stage of the preparation of the emulsion recognized as useful hitherto.
  • they may be added at any stage if it is before coating, i.e., before grain formation stage of silver halide grains and/or before desalting stage, during desalting stage and/or after desalting and before beginning of chemical ripening, as disclosed in U.S. Patents 2,735,766, 3,628,960, 4,183,756, 4,225,666, JP-A-58-184142 and JP-A-60-196749, or immediately before or during chemical ripening, after chemical ripening and before coating as disclosed in JP-A-58-113920. Also, as disclosed in U.S.
  • the dyes can be used as a single compound alone or in combination with compounds having foreign structures, and they may be divided and added separately, for example, one part of them is added during grain formation stage and the remaining is added during chemical ripening or after the completion of chemical ripening, otherwise one part is added prior to chemical ripening or during ripening stage and the remaining after completion of chemical ripening.
  • the kinds of compounds added separately and combinations of compounds may be varied.
  • the use amount of the methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III) , (IV), (V) , (VI) , (VII) , (VIII) , (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention varies in accordance with the shape and the size of silver halide grains, but is preferably from 1 ⁇ 10 -2 to 1 ⁇ 10 -8 mol per mol of the silver halide.
  • sensitizing dyes can be used in combination besides the methine dyes represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention.
  • Sensitizing dyes are often used in combination, in particular, for the purpose of supersensitization. Representative examples thereof are disclosed in U.S.
  • silver chloride, silver bromide, silver chlorobromide, silver iodobromide, silver iodochloride, and silver chloroiodobromide can be used as silver halide grains in the silver halide photographic material according to the present invention.
  • the silver halide grains contained in the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention have an average grain size (the grain size herein refers to the diameter of the equivalent circle corresponding to the projected area of the grains, and the number average is taken as the average grain size) of preferably from 0.1 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • a so-called monodispersed emulsion having a variation coefficient (the value obtained by dividing the standard deviation of the grain size distribution by the average grain size) of 20% or less, preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less, is preferred.
  • a variation coefficient the value obtained by dividing the standard deviation of the grain size distribution by the average grain size
  • the silver halide grains contained in a photographic emulsion may have a regular crystal form, such as cubic, octahedral or tetradecahedral form, an irregular crystal form, such as spherical or plate-like form, or a composite form of these forms.
  • the grains having the above described regular crystal forms preferably account for 50% or more, preferably 70% or more, and more preferably 90% or more.
  • an emulsion in which the proportion of tabular grains having an average aspect ratio (equivalent-circle diameter/thickness) of 5 or more, preferably 8 or more, to the entire grains exceeds 50% as a projected area can also be preferably used.
  • the emulsion for use in the present invention can be prepared according to the methods disclosed, for example, in P. Glafkides, Chimie et Physique Photographique, Paul Montel (1967), G.F. Duffin, Photographic Emulsion Chemistry, Focal Press (1966), V.L. Zelikman, et al., Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion, Focal Press (1964), and so on. That is, any process, such as an acid process, a neutral process, and an ammoniacal process, can be used. A single jet method, a double jet method, and a combination of them may be used for reacting a soluble silver salt with a soluble halide, and any of these methods can be used.
  • a method in which silver halide grains are formed in the atmosphere of excessive silver ions may also be used.
  • a so-called controlled double jet method which is one form of a double jet method, in which the pAg of the liquid phase in which the silver halide is formed is maintained constant, may also be used. According to this method, a silver halide emulsion having a regular crystal form and substantially an almost uniform grain size can be obtained.
  • the silver halide emulsions for use in the present invention are generally chemically sensitized.
  • chemical sensitization according to the present invention chemical sensitization using chalcogen sensitizers (typically, sulfur sensitization represented by the addition of labile sulfur compounds, selenium sensitization by selenium compounds, and tellurium sensitization by tellurium compounds can be exemplified), noble metal sensitization represented by gold sensitization, and reduction sensitization are used alone or in combination.
  • chalcogen sensitizers typically, sulfur sensitization represented by the addition of labile sulfur compounds, selenium sensitization by selenium compounds, and tellurium sensitization by tellurium compounds can be exemplified
  • noble metal sensitization represented by gold sensitization and reduction sensitization are used alone or in combination.
  • the compounds disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, from p. 18, right lower column to p. 22, right upper column are preferably used in the chemical sensitization of the present invention.
  • Various compounds and precursors thereof can be added to the silver halide emulsions of the present invention for the purpose of preventing generation of fog or stabilizingphotographic performances during production, storage or photographic processing of the photographic material.
  • the compounds disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, from pp. 39 to 72 are preferably used.
  • 5-arylamino-1,2,3,4-thiatriazole compounds (the aryl residue has at least one electron attractive group) disclosed in European Patent 0447647 are also preferably used.
  • the silver halide emulsions produced according to the present invention can be used in both color photographic materials, such as color papers, color films for photographing, and color reversal films, and black-and-white photographic materials, such as X-ray films, general films for photographing, and photographic films for printing, and preferably used as color photographic materials.
  • color photographic materials such as color papers, color films for photographing, and color reversal films
  • black-and-white photographic materials such as X-ray films, general films for photographing, and photographic films for printing, and preferably used as color photographic materials.
  • a hydrophilic colloid layer for the purpose of preventing irradiation and halation and improving safelight stability.
  • water-soluble dyes which can be used as such a coloring substance, the dyes capable of decoloration by processing (oxonol dyes and cyanine dyes, above all) disclosed in EP-A-0337490, pages 27 to 76, can be exemplified.
  • a coloring substance disperses regardless of the position where it is added and pervades over the entire constitutional layers of the photographic material by such coloration.
  • Cyan, magenta and yellow couplers are preferably impregnated in a loadable latex polymer (e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,203,716) in the presence (or absence) of the high boiling point organic solvents described in the above table, or dissolved in a polymer insoluble in water but soluble in an organic solvent and emulsified and dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid aqueous solution.
  • a loadable latex polymer e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,203,716
  • polymers insoluble in water but soluble in an organic solvent which can preferably be used in the present invention include homopolymers or copolymers disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,857,449, from pages 12 to 30.
  • Methacrylate based or acrylamide based polymers are more preferred, in particular, acrylamide based polymers are preferred in the light of color image stability.
  • color image preservability improving compounds disclosed in EP-A-0277589 in combination with the couplers.
  • the use in combination with pyrazoloazole couplers or pyrrolotriazole couplers is preferred.
  • the use of the compound disclosed in the above EP Patent which produces a chemically inactive and substantially colorless compound upon chemically bonding with an aromatic amine developing agent remaining after color development processing and/or the compound disclosed in the above EP Patent which produces a chemically inactive and substantially colorless compound upon chemically bonding with the oxidized product of an aromatic amine color developing agent remaining after color development processing, alone or in combination, is preferred for preventing the generation of stain due to the formation of a colored dye caused by the coupling reaction of the coupler with the color developing agent or the oxidized product thereof remaining in the film, or preventing other side reactions, during preservation after processing.
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[3,2-d]thiazole was obtained at a yield of 34% by reacting 3-acetylamino-2,5-dibromothiophene (synthesized according to J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1954, 76, 2447) with phosphorous pentasulfide in toluene under heat-reflux.
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole was obtained at a yield of 96% by adding dropwise bromine to 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole (synthesized according to J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1983, 20, 113) in the presence of sodium acetate in an acetic acid solvent.
  • 5-Chloro-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole was obtained by making trichloroisocyanuric acid act on the above 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole in a dichloromethane solvent. Yield: 98%.
  • Orange powder of S-97 was synthesized in the same manner as in Example 4 except for using 3-[5-fluoro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propanesulfonate in place of 3-[5-chloro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propanesulfonate.
  • oxime was prepared using 2-acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene and hydroxylamine (yield: 88%), and the oxime was further acetylated with acetic anhydride (yield: 69%).
  • the oxime acetate was subjected to treatment with sodium hydroxide in an N,N-dimethylformamide solvent at room temperature, thereby the objective 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole was obtained (yield: 57%).
  • 4-chloromethyl-2-methylthiazole was synthesized with 1,3-dichloroacetone and thioacetamide as starting materials.
  • the above-obtained 4-chloromethyl-2-methylthiazole was converted to a 4-hydroxymethyl body by dilute sulfuric acid, and then introduced into a 4-formyl body by oxidation of manganese dioxide (yield to this point: 62%).
  • 5-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole was obtained by making ethyl azidoacetate act on the above product in the presence of sodium ethoxide and further heating in xylene (yield: 31%).
  • a multilayer color photographic material was prepared as Sample No. 101 by coating each layer having the following composition on an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support having a thickness of 127 ⁇ m.
  • the numeral corresponding to each component indicates the addition weight per m 2 .
  • the functions of the compounds added are not limited to the use described.
  • Second Layer Interlayer Gelatin 0.38 g Compound Cpd-K 5.0 mg Ultraviolet Absorber U-2 3.0 mg High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-3 0.06 g Dye D-4 10.0 mg
  • Third Layer Interlayer Yellow Colloidal Silver silver amount: 0.007 g Gelatin 0.40 g
  • Fourth Layer First Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer Emulsion A silver amount: 0.55 g Emulsion B silver amount: 0.23 g Surface Fogged Fine Grain Silver Iodobromide Emulsion (average grain size: 0.11 ⁇ m) silver amount: 0.07 g Gelatin 1.11 g Coupler C-1 0.04 g Coupler C-2 0.09 g
  • Additives F-1 to F-11 were further added to every emulsion layer in addition to the above components.
  • Gelatin Hardener H-1 and Surfactants W-1, W-3, W-4, W-5 and W-6 for coating and emulsifying were added to every layer in addition to the above components.
  • Photosensitive emulsions used in Sample No. 101 are shown in Table 1 below.
  • Dye E-1 shown below was dispersed according to the following method. That is, water and 70 g of W-4 were added to 1,400 g of a wet cake of the dye containing 30% of water, and the mixture was stirred to obtain a slurry having 30% dye concentration. Next, 1,700 ml of zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm was filled in an ultravisco mill (UVM-2) manufactured by Imex Co., the slurry was passed and pulverized at a peripheral speed of about 10 m/sec and discharge amount of 0.5 l/min for 8 hours.
  • UVM-2 ultravisco mill
  • Sample Nos. 102 to 130 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Sample No. 101 except that Sensitizing Dye Sen-2 or Sen-7 in the emulsions used in Sample No. 101 were replaced in equimolar amount as shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • Sample No. 100 i.e., blank sample
  • Each of the thus-obtained samples was subjected to 20 CMS white light exposure for 1/100 sec. through a gray wedge. The exposed sample was processed according to the processing step shown below and sensitometry was carried out. Further, residual colors were evaluated by subtracting the yellow stain density and magenta stain density of Sample No.
  • composition of each processing solution used was as follows. First Developing Solution Tank Solution Replenisher Pentasodium Nitrilo-N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonate 1.5 g 1.5 g Pentasodium Diethylene-triaminepentaacetate 2.0 g 2.0 g Sodium Sulfite 30 g 30 g Potassium Hydroquinone-monosulfonate 20 g 20 g Potassium Carbonate 15 g 20 g Sodium Bicarbonate 12 g 15 g 1-Phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidone 1.5 g 2.0 g Potassium Bromide 2.5 g 1.4 g Potassium Thiocyanate 1.2 g 1.2 g Potassium Iodide 2.0 mg - Diethylene Glycol 13 g 15 g Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml pH (adjusted with sulfuric acid or potassium hydroxide) 9.60 9.60 Reversal Solution Tank Solution Replenisher Pentasodium Nitrilo-N
  • An aqueous solution (1,164 ml) comprised of 0.017 g of KBr and 0.4 g of oxidation-processed gelatin having an average molecular weight of 20,000 was stirred with maintaining the temperature at 35°C.
  • An aqueous solution containing 1.6 g of AgNO 3 , an aqueous solution of KBr and an aqueous solution containing 2.1 g of oxidation-processed gelatin having an average molecular weight of 20,000 were added to the above solution by a triple jet method over 48 seconds. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at 13 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • An aqueous solution of KBr was added thereto, and the silver potential was adjusted to -66 mV, and the temperature was raised to 60°C. After 21 g of succinated gelatin having an average molecular weight of 100,000 was added to the above solution, an aqueous solution containing 5.1 g of NaCl was added. An aqueous solution containing 206.3 g of AgNO 3 and an aqueous solution containing KBr were added thereto by a double jet method over 61 minutes with accelerating the flow rate. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -44 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • succinated gelatin having an average molecular weight of 100,000 was added to the solution to adjust pH to 5.8 and pAg to 8.8 at 40°C, thus a seed emulsion was obtained.
  • the seed emulsion was tabular grain emulsion containing 1 mol of Ag and 80 g of gelatin per kg of the emulsion, and having an average equivalent-circle diameter of 1.46 ⁇ m, an equivalent-circle diametyer variation coefficient of 28%, an average thickness of 0.046 ⁇ m, and an average aspect ratio of 32.
  • An aqueous solution containing 43.9 g of AgNO 3 , an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in another chamber equipped with a magnetic coupling induction stirrer disclosed in JP-A-10-43570, and added to the above emulsion over 25 minutes. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -40 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • an aqueous solution containing 43.9 g of AgNO 3 , an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 20 minutes. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -40 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • an aqueous solution containing 42.6 g of AgNO 3 , an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 17 minutes.
  • the silver potential was maintained at -20 mV to the saturated calomel electrode, and then the temperature was lowered to 55°C.
  • the silver potential was adjusted to -55 mV, and an aqueous solution containing 7.1 g of AgNO 3 , an aqueous solution containing 6.9 g of KI, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 5 minutes.
  • an aqueous solution containing 66.4 g of AgNO 3 and an aqueous solution containing KBr were added to the above emulsion by a double jet method over 30 minutes at constant flow rate.
  • Potassium iridium hexachloride and yellow prussiate of potash were added en route.
  • the silver potential was maintained at 30 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • the emulsion was subjected to ordinary washing, and then gelatin was added to adjust pH to 5.8 and pAg to 8.8 at 40°C. The thus-obtained emulsion was designated Emulsion b.
  • Emulsion b was a tabular grain emulsion having an average equivalent-circle diameter of 3.3 ⁇ m, an equivalent-circle diameter variation coefficient of 21%, an average thickness of 0.090 ⁇ m and an average aspect ratio of 37. Tabular grains having an equivalent-circle diameter of 3.3 ⁇ m or more and a thickness of 0.090 ⁇ m or less accounted for 70% or more of the entire projected area of Emulsion b.
  • Emulsion b was heated at 56°C, and after the sensitizing dye shown in Table 4 was added in an amount of 1.1x10 -3 mol/mol Ag, C-5, potassium thiocyanate, chloroauric acid, sodium thiosulfate and N,N-dimethylselenourea were added and the emulsion was optimally chemically sensitized, and stirred for 60 minutes.
  • the sensitizing dye was used as the solid fine particle dispersion prepared according to the method disclosed in JP-A-11-52507. That is, 0.8 weight parts of sodium nitrate and 3.2 weight parts of sodium sulfate were dissolved in 43 parts of ion exchange water, 13 weight parts of the sensitizing dye was added to the above solution, and dispersed by means of dissolver blades at 2,000 rpm for 20 minutes on the condition of 60°C, thereby a solid dispersion of the sensitizing dye was obtained.
  • the density of each processed sample was measured, i.e., Sample Nos. 201 to 206 were measured through a red filter, Sample Nos. 207 to 209 were measured through a green filter, and Sample Nos. 210 to 214 were measured through a blue filter respectively and sensitivity was evaluated.
  • the reciprocal of the exposure amount giving density of fog density + 0.2 is taken as sensitivity, and sensitivity of each sample is shown in a relative value taking the value of Sample No. 201 as 100 with Sample Nos. 201 to 206, taking the value of Sample No. 207 as 100 with Sample Nos. 207 to 209, and taking the value of Sample No. 210 as 100 with Sample Nos. 210 to 214.
  • the sensitizing dye formed a J-association body having absorption maximum at about 605 nm in Sample No. 206, and at about 487 nm in Sample No. 213, and each sensitizing dye showed similar spectral sensitivity distribution to that of absorption.
  • samples in Table 5 were subjected to color development processing in the same manner as above (ordinarily processed samples) as one group, and the samples were subjected to sufficient washing processing (that is, the same processing was performed except that the time of washing (2) in the processing step was changed to 30 minutes) to completely remove the remaining sensitizing dyes (washing-processed samples) as the other group, each sample was not subjected to exposure. Since the samples did not undergo exposure, development did not occur and image-forming dyes were not formed.
  • the spectrum by transmission mode of from 360 to 700 nm of each sample was recorded with a spectrophotometer.
  • the difference spectrum of the ordinarily processed sample and the washing-processed sample was taken.
  • the absorption of the difference spectrum means the amount of the retained dye, i.e., the residual color of the sensitizing dye.
  • the residual color of each sample is shown in a relative value of the absorbance of the peak wavelength of each sample taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 201 as 100 with Sample Nos. 201 to 206, taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 207 as 100 with Sample Nos. 207 to 209, and taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 210 as 100 with Sample Nos. 210 to 214.
  • pressure resistance test was performed as follows . A needle having a diameter of 0.1 mm was put on the above sample before exposure and 5 g of load was applied to the needle and the needle was moved at a rate of 600 mm/min. (pressure processing) . The difference in density between the part where pressure processing was performed and the part where pressure processing was not performed (pressure marks) of the sample which had been development-processed without undergoing exposure was measured with a micro-densitometer having an aperture diameter of 10 ⁇ m.
  • the samples containing the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are high sensitivity and conspicuously low in residual color as compared with the samples containing comparative dyes.
  • sensitivity is markedly improved in trimethyl cyanine dyes.
  • the samples containing the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are also excellent in pressure marks (i.e., pressure resistance).
  • an aqueous solution of silver nitrate (containing 71 g of silver nitrate) and an NaCl aqueous solution (containing 24.2 g of NaCl, 1.39 g of KI and 12 mg of yellow prussiate of potash) were added to the reaction mixture at an accelerated flow rate over 14 minutes.
  • the temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 75 °C over 20 minutes, and an aqueous solution of silver nitrate (containing 2.9 g of silver nitrate) and a KBr aqueous solution (containing 2.25 g of KBr) were added to the reaction solution at a constant flow rate over 1 minute.
  • Emulsion A was optimally chemically sensitized at 60 °C using Sen-17, Sen-18, Sen-19, S-132 and S-78 shown in Table 6, sodium benzylthiosulfonate, sodium thiocyanate, 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole, sodium thiosulfate and chloroauric acid.
  • the surface of a paper support both surfaces of which were laminatedwith polyethylene resin was subjected to corona discharge treatment.
  • the support was provided with a gelatin undercoat layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, and further, photographic constitution layers, from the first layer to the seventh layer, described below were coated in order to prepare a silver halide color photographic material samples shown below.
  • the coating solution of each photographic constitution layer was prepared as described below.
  • Each coupler, color image stabilizer and ultraviolet absorber were dissolved in a solvent and ethyl acetate.
  • the solution was emulsified and dispersed in a 10 weight% gelatin aqueous solution containing a surfactant by means of a high speed dissolver, thus an emulsified dispersion was prepared.
  • Ab-1, Ab-2 and Ab-3 were added to each layer so that the total amount became 15.0 mg/m 2 , 60.0 mg/m 2 and 5.0 mg/m 2 , respectively.
  • High silver chloride emulsion used in each photosensitive emulsion layer was as follows.
  • Compound I was added to a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 3.0x10 -3 mol per mol of the silver halide.
  • 1-(3-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was added to a blue-sensitive emulsion layer, a green-sensitive emulsion layer and a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 3.3x10 -4 mol, 1.0x10 -3 mol and 5.9x10 -4 mol, respectively, per mol of the silver halide.
  • 1- (3-methylureidophenyl) -5-mercaptotetrazole was added to the second layer, the fourth layer, the sixth layer and the seventh layer in an amount of 0.2 mg/m 2 , 0.2 mg/m 2 , 0.6 mg/m 2 and 0.1 mg/m 2 , respectively.
  • 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetraazaindene was added to a blue-sensitive emulsion layer and a green-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 1x10 -4 mol and 2x10 -4 mol respectively, per mol of the silver halide.
  • Copolymer of methacrylic acid and butyl acrylate (weight ratio: 1/1, average molecular weight: from 200,000 to 400,000) was added to a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 0.05 g/m 2 . Further, disodium catechol-3,5-disulfonate was added to the second layer, the fourth layer and the sixth layer in an amount of 6 mg/m 2 , 6 mg/m 2 and 18 mg/m 2 , respectively.
  • the constitution of each layer is described below.
  • the numeral represents the coating amount (g/m 2 ).
  • the numeral for an emulsion represents the coating amount in terms of silver.
  • Polyethylene resin-laminated paper [a white pigment (TiO 2 , content: 16 weight%, ZnO, content: 4 weight%), a brightening agent (13 mg/m 2 of 4,4'-bis(5-methylbenzoxazolyl)stilbene), and 96 mg/m 2 of a bluish dye (ultramarine) were added to the polyethylene resin of the first layer side].
  • Coated Sample Nos. 301 to 304 were prepared by using emulsions shown in Table 6 in the blue-sensitive layer of the photographic material having the above layer constitution.
  • YAG solid state laser oscillation wavelength: 946 nm
  • GaAlAs oscillation wavelength: 808.5 nm
  • AlGaInP oscillation wavelength: 680 nm, manufactured by Matsushita Densan Co., Ltd., Type No.
  • Each of three laser beams was made to be able to successively scanning expose a color photographic paper transferring vertically to scanning direction by a polygonal mirror the intensity of which was modulated by AOM.
  • the temperature of semiconductor laser was maintained constant using Peltier element.
  • scanning exposure was performed at 600 dpi, and every beam diameter of B, G and R measured with a beam diameter meter (1180GP manufactured by Beam Scan Co., U.S.A.) was 65 ⁇ m (circular beams showing the difference in diameters in the main scanning direction/sub scanning direction of within 1%).
  • the thus-exposed samples were processed by CP45X processing (manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.).
  • the reflection density of each processed color sample was measured using a TCD type densitometer (manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.). Sensitivity was expressed as the logarithm of the exposure amount required to give color density of fog density + 1.0. Sensitivity of the blue-sensitive layer of each sample is shown in Table 7. In Table 7, sensitivity of each sample is shown in a relative value taking the value of Sample No. 301 as 0.00. A positive value shows that sensitivity is high.
  • Pressuremarks (i.e., pressure resistance) testwasperformed as follows. A needle having a diameter of 0.1 mm was put on each of the above samples and 10 g of load was applied to the needle and the needle was moved at a rate of 600 mm/min . (pressure processing). The difference in density between the part where pressure processing was performed and the part where pressure processing was not performed (pressure marks) of the sample which had been development-processed without undergoing exposure was measured with a micro-densitometer having an aperture diameter of 10 ⁇ m. The results obtained are shown in Table 7. Sample No. Grains Blue Light Exposure Pressure Marks Remarks Fog Sensitivity 301 A 0.04 0.00 0.185 Comparison 302 A 0.04 0.02 0 160 Comparison 303 A 0.03 0.08 0.090 Invention 304 A 0.03 0.05 0.105 Invention
  • the emulsions according to the present invention are high sensitivity, pressure marks are suppressed and stability is improved.
  • a tabular silver iodobromide emulsion was prepared according to the method of preparing Emulsion D in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904 and this was designated Emulsion Q.
  • Multilayer color photographic materials were prepared according to the method of preparation of Sample No. 101 in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904.
  • Sample Nos. 401 and 402 were prepared by replacing Emulsion D in the fifth layer of Sample No. 101 in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904 with Emulsion Q, and further replacing ExS-1, 2 and 3 with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (5.0 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (5.0 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol).
  • each sample was exposed for 1/100 sec. through an optical wedge and a red filter with Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), color development processing was performed using the same processing step and processing solutions as in Example 1 of JP-A-8-29904 and cyan density was measured.
  • Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give density of fog density + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value.
  • Sample No. 402 according to the present invention showed high sensitivity of 113 as compared with sensitivity 100 (control) of comparative Sample No. 401. Sample No. 402 also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • Emulsion 1 in Example 1 of JP-A-7-92601 the spectral sensitizing dyes were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (8 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (8 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) to prepare tetradecahedral silver iodobromide emulsions, the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion R and Emulsion S.
  • Emulsion 1 in Example 1 of JP-A-7-92601 the silver potential during the second double jet was changed from +65 mV to +115 mV, further, the spectral sensitizing dyes were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (8 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (8 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) to prepare cubic silver iodobromide emulsions, the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion T and Emulsion U.
  • Multilayer color photographic materials were prepared according to the method of preparation of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601.
  • Emulsion 1 in the ninth layer of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601 was replaced with Emulsion R or Emulsion S, the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 411 and 412.
  • Emulsion 1 in the ninth layer of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601 was replaced with Emulsion T or Emulsion U, and these samples were designated Sample Nos. 413 and 414.
  • Octahedral silver bromide internal latent image type direct positive emulsion and hexagonal tabular silver bromide internal latent image type direct positive emulsion were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsions 1 and 5 in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297 and these emulsions were named Emulsion V and Emulsion W.
  • Emulsion F in Example 2 of JP-A-4-142536 red-sensitive sensitizing dye (S-1) was not added before sulfur sensitization, in addition to sulfur sensitization using triethylthiourea, chloroauric acid was used in combination and optimally gold-sulfur sensitized, and after gold-sulfur sensitization, Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (2 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (2 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) was added, the thus-obtained silver chlorobromide emulsions were designated Emulsions X and Y.
  • Multilayer color photographic papers were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Sample No. 20 in Example 1 of JP-A-6-347944.
  • the emulsion in the fifth layer of Sample No. 20 in Example 1 of JP-A-6-347944 was replaced with Emulsion X or Y, these samples were designated Sample Nos. 431 and 432.
  • Tabular silver chloride emulsions were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion A in Example 1 of JP-A-8-122954.
  • Chemical sensitization (B) in Example 1 of the same patent Sensitizing Dye-1 and Dye-2 were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (2 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (2 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion ZA and Emulsion ZB.
  • Coated samples were prepared by replacing the emulsion in Example 1 of JP-A-8-122954 with Emulsion ZA or Emulsion ZB and an emulsion layer and a surface protective layer were coated in combination on both sides of the support by a simultaneous extrusion method similar to in Example 1, these samples were designated Sample Nos. 441 and 442.
  • the coated silver amount per one side was 1.75 g/m 2 .
  • Tabular silver chloride emulsion was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion D in Example 2 of JP-A-8-227117 except that Sensitizing Dye-2 and Dye-3 were not added. This emulsion was designated Emulsion ZC.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Coated Sample No. Fin Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117.
  • Emulsion F in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117 was replaced with Emulsion ZC, and Sensitizing Dye-1 in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 was replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 451 and 452.
  • samples were exposed for 1/100 second through an optical wedge and a blue filter using Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), subjected to Fuji Photo Film CN16 processing and photographic characteristics were compared.
  • Fuji FW type sensitometer a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
  • Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 451 as 100.
  • Sample No. 452 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 124, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • Octahedral silver chloride emulsion was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117, this was designated Emulsion ZD.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117.
  • Emulsion F and Sensitizing Dye-1 in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117 were replaced with Emulsion ZD and Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 461 and 462.
  • Tabular grain emulsions were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion CC disclosed in European Patent 0699950, and in chemical sensitization Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 was added in an amount of 5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Agmol and chemical sensitization was performed, then Sen-12 was added in an amount of 3 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol, thereafter, further, Sen-12 was added in an amount of 3 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol, this emulsion was designated Emulsion ZE, or S-76 was addedin an amount of 5 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Agmol and chemical sensitization was performed, then S-76 was added in an amount of 3 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol, thereafter, further, S-76 was added in an amount of 3 ⁇ 10 -4 mol/Ag mol, this emulsion was designated Emulsion ZF.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of the coated samples in the example of European Patent 0699950, and a sample in which Emulsion ZE was used was designated Sample No. 471, and ZF was used was designated Sample No. 472.
  • the thus-prepared samples were subjected to exposure and development in the same manner as in European Patent 0699950 and photographic characteristics were compared.
  • Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Sample No. 471 as 100.
  • Sample No. 472 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 136, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • Sample No. 101 in Example 8 was prepared and designated Sample No. 501.
  • Sample Nos. 502 to 516 were prepared by replacing sensitizing dye Sen-2 or Sen-7 used in the emulsion of Sample No. 501 with equimolar amount of the dye shown in Table 8 and Table 9, and Sample No. 500 (blank sample) was prepared by excluding both dyes.
  • Each piece of the samples thus obtained was subjected to 20 CMS white light exposure for 1/100 sec. through a gray wedge, then processed by the same processing step and same processing solutions as in Example 8, and sensitometry was performed.
  • the yellow stain density and the magenta stain density of blank Sample No. 500 were subtracted from the yellow stain density and magenta stain density of each piece of the samples after processing and residual color was evaluated.
  • the stain density was measured using a densitometer Status A, a product of X-RITE Co.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Silver Salt Photography Or Processing Solution Therefor (AREA)
  • Non-Silver Salt Photosensitive Materials And Non-Silver Salt Photography (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed is a silver halide photographic material which comprises at least one methine dye represented by the following formula (I):
Figure 80000001
wherein Y represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a single bond or a double bond; Z represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye; L1 and L2 each represents a methine group; p represents 0 or 1; M represents a counter ion; and m represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
  • This is a continuation-in-part application of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/536,679 filed March 28, 2000.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to a silver halide photographic material and more particularly relates to a silver halide photographic material which is high sensitive and generates less residual colors after processing.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Every endeavor has been made for higher sensitization and reduction of residual colors after processing of a silver halide photographic material. It is known that a sensitizing dye which is used for spectral sensitization exerts a great influence on the capabilities of a silver halide photographic material. A trace of structural difference of a sensitizing dye largely affects photographic capabilities such as sensitivity, fog, storage stability and residual colors after processing. Photographic performances are also largely influenced by the combined use of two or more kinds of sensitizing dyes but it is difficult to foresee its effect. Many engineers have hitherto synthesized various kinds of sensitizing dyes, examined the combined use of sensitizing dyes and endeavored to investigate photographic capabilities thereof, however, it is not possible to know photographic capabilities in advance yet.
  • For that reason, a technique of spectral sensitization capable of improving sensitivity of silver halide grains without causing adverse effects such as fog and residual colors has been required.
  • Also, it is known that the present durability is deteriorated by adsorbing onto the surface of silver halide grains the sensitizing dye used for the spectral sensitization. Accordingly, a sensitizing dye in which the pressure durability is not deteriorated is desired.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a silver halide photographic material which is high speed and generates less residual colors after processing, and also is to provide a silver halide photographic material not deteriorating the pressure durability.
  • As a result of earnest investigations, the above object of the present invention has been attained by the following means . That is:
  • (1) A silver halide photographic material which comprises at least one methine dye represented by the following formula (I):
    Figure 00020001
    wherein Y represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; Z represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group;
    D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye; L1 and L2 each represents a methine group; p represents 0 or 1; M represents a counter ion; and m represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (2) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein the condensed ring containing Y and Z in the methine dye represented by formula (I) is selected from the following Y-1 to Y-26, provided that Y-1 to Y-26 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocylic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent:
    Figure 00030001
    Figure 00040001
    Figure 00040002
    Figure 00040003
    Figure 00040004
    Figure 00040005
    Figure 00040006
    in each structural formula, * represents a position to link to a methine chain.
  • (3) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (II):
    Figure 00050001
    wherein X21 and X22 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom; V21 and V22 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and they may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring; and D, R, M and m each has the same meaning as in formula (I).
  • (4) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (3), wherein V21 and V22 in the methine dye represented by formula (II) do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • (5) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (4), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (II) , X22 represents a sulfur atom, R is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and V21 and V22 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • (6) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (III):
    Figure 00060001
    wherein X23 and X24 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom; V23 and V24 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and they may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring; and D, R, M and m each has the same meaning as in formula (I).
  • (7) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (6), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (III), V23 and V24 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time; and when X23 represents a sulfur atom, V23 does not represent a phenyl group or V24 does not represent a methyl group.
  • (8) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (7), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (III), X24 represents a sulfur atom; R is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group; V23 and V24 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time; and when X23 represents a sulfur atom, V23 does not represent a phenyl group or V24 does not represent a methyl group.
  • (9) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (IV):
    Figure 00070001
    wherein X1 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, N-R3, or -La=Lb-; Y1 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y1 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; Z1 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z1 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R1, R2 and R3 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; L3, Lb, L3, L4, L5, L6 and L7 each represents a methine group; n1 represents an integer of 0 or higher; p1 represents 0 or 1; M1 represents a counter ion; and m1 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (10) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (9), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (IV), at least one of the atomic group constituting the heterocyclic ring Y1 (exclusive of the substituents on the ring) and X1 contains an oxygen atom.
  • (11) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (9) , wherein the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is represented by the following formula (V):
    Figure 00080001
    wherein X3 and X4 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom; Y3 represents a furan ring, and Y3 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; Y4 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y4 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; R4 and R5 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; M2 represents a counter ion; and m2 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (12) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (9) , wherein the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is represented by the following formula (VI):
    Figure 00090001
    wherein X5 and X6 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom but at least either one represents an oxygen atom; Y5 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y5 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; Y6 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y6 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; R6, R7 and R8 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; M3 represents a counter ion; and m3 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (13) A methine dye represented by the following formula (VII):
    Figure 00100001
    wherein X31 and X32 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom; V31 and V32 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time; Y31 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y31 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; R31 and R32 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group; L32, L33 and L34 each represents a methine group; n31 represents an integer of 0 or higher; M31 represents a counter ion; and m31 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (14) The methine dye as described in the above item (13), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (VII), X31 represents a sulfur atom; V31 represents a hydrogen atom; and V32 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • (15) A methine dye represented by the following formula (VIII):
    Figure 00110001
    wherein X33 and X34 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom; V33 and V34 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time; Y32 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y32 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; R33 and R34 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group; L35, L36 and L37 each represents a methine group; n32 represents an integer of 0 or higher; M32 represents a counter ion; and m32 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (16) The methine dye as described in the above item (15), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (VIII), X33 represents a sulfur atom; V34 represents a hydrogen atom; and V33 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • (17) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1) which contains at least one methine dye represented by formula (VII) or (VIII).
  • (18) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (I), Y represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent.
  • (19) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (18), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (XX) :
    Figure 00120001
    wherein Y51 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y51 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; X51 and X52 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom; Y52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y52 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; R51 and R52 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; L51, L52 and L53 each represents a methine group; n51 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; M51 represents a counter ion; and m51 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (20) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (1), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (I) , Y represents a thiophene ring, which maybe condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one substituent.
  • (21) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (20), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (I) , Y represents a thiophene ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one halogen atom.
  • (22) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (21), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (XXX):
    Figure 00140001
    wherein Y61 represents a thiophene ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one halogen atom, and two carbon atoms to which Y61 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; X61 and X62 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom; Y62 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y62 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; R61 and R62 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; L61, L62 and L63 each represents a methine group; n61 represents 0 or 1; M61 represents a counter ion; and m61 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (23) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (22), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), n61 represents 1.
  • (24) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (22), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), at least either R61 or R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical.
  • (25) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (24), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), both R61 and R62 represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical.
  • (26) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (25), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), at least either R61 or R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group.
  • (27) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (26), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), at least either R61 or R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group, a -CONHSO2- group, an -SO2NHCO- group, a -CONHCO- group, or an -SO2NHSO2- group.
  • (28) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (25) or (26), wherein in themethine dye represented by formula (XXX), one of R61 and R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group.
  • (29) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (28), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXX), either R61 or R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group, a -CONHSO2- group, an -SO2NHCO- group, a -CONHCO- group, or an -SO2NHSO2- group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group.
  • (30) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (22), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is represented by the following formula (XXXI) or (XXXII):
    Figure 00160001
    Figure 00160002
    wherein L61, L62 and L63 each represents a methine group; V61 represents a halogen atom; X61, X62, Y62, R61, R62, L61, L62, L63, n61, M61 and m61 each has the same meaning as defined in formula (XXX) in the above item (22).
  • (31) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (30), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII) is represented by the following formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa):
    Figure 00170001
    Figure 00170002
    wherein V85 represents a halogen atom; X81 and X82 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; R81 and R82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical; V81, V82, V83 and V84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; M81 represents a counter ion; and m81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (32) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (31), wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa), at least either R81 or R82 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group.
  • (33) The silver halide photographic material as described in the above item (30), wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII) is represented by the following formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb):
    Figure 00180001
    Figure 00190001
    wherein V95 represents a halogen atom; X91 and X92 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; R91 and R92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; A91 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group; V91, V92, V93 and V94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; M91 represents a counter ion; and m91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • (34) The silver halide photographic material as described in any of the above items (1) to (33), which contains the dye forming J association described in any of the above items (1) to (33).
  • (35) A methine dye described in any of the above items (18) to (34).
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention will be described in detail below.
  • In the first place, the methine dye represented by formula (I) according to the present invention will be described in detail below.
  • Examples of the 5-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y include a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a furan ring, an oxazole ring, an isooxazole ring, a thiophene ring, a thiazole ring, an isothiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a selenophene ring, a selenazole ring, an isoselenazole ring, a tellurophene ring, a tellurazole ring, and an isotellurazole ring, and examples of the 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y include a pyridine ring, a pyridazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyran ring, and a thiopyran ring. Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring to form, e.g., an indole ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, or a thienothiophene ring. The preferred 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic rings formed by Y are a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, and a pyridine ring, and particularly preferred is a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring or a furan ring. Also, the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a sigle bond or a double bond. Particularly, a double bond is preferred.
  • The 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring represented by Z may be condensed with a carbocyclic ring such as a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, or a naphthalene ring, or a heterocyclic ring such as a pyrazine ring or a thiophene ring. Z preferably represents an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a selenazole ring, an imidazole ring, a 2-pyridine ring, or a 4-pyridine ring. Z more preferably represents an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyridine ring, still more preferably represents an oxazole ring or a thiazole ring, and particularly preferably a thiazole ring.
  • The alkyl group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 7, and particularly preferably from 1 to 4, carbon atoms (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl, octadecyl), and a substituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 7, and particularly preferably from 1 to 4, carbon atoms [examples of the substituents include, e.g., an aryl group having from 6 to 12 carbon atoms (e.g., phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-tolyl), an unsaturated hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms (e.g., vinyl), a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group having from 1 to 7 carbon atoms (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, 2-methoxyethoxy, benzyloxy), an aryloxy group having from 6 to 12 carbon atoms (e.g., phenoxy, 1-naphthoxy), an alkylthio group having from 1 to 7 carbon atoms (e.g., methylthio), an arylthio group having from 6 to 12 carbon atoms (e.g., phenylthio, 1-naphthylthio), an acyl group having from 1 to 7 carbon atoms (e.g., acetyl, benzoyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., ethoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group having from 7 to 13 carbon atoms (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), an acyloxy group having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (e.g., acetyloxy), a carbamoyl group (e.g., morpholinocarbonyl), a sulfamoyl group (e.g., N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl), a heterocyclic group (e.g., tetrahydrofuryl), an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbamoyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl), an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), and an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)] can be exemplified.
  • The aryl group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted aryl group having from 6 to 20, preferably from 6 to 15, and more preferably from 6 to 10, carbonatoms (e.g., phenyl, 1-naphthyl), and a substituted aryl group having from 6 to 26, preferably from 6 to 21, and more preferably from 6 to 16, carbon atoms [examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl sulfamoyl group) , and an alkyl group (which may be substituted) ] can be exemplified, and preferred is a phenyl group.
  • The heterocyclic group represented by R may be substituted or unsubstituted, for example, an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having from 1 to 20, preferably from 1 to 15, and more preferably from 1 to 10, carbon atoms (e.g., pyrrole, furan, thiophene), and a substituted azole group having from 1 to 26, preferably 1 to 21, and more preferably 1 to 16, carbon atoms [examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted)] can be exemplified.
  • R preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl) , an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)), and more preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • The methine group represented by L1 or L2 may have a substituent, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, etc.) , and an alkyl group (which may be substituted).
  • p preferably represents 0.
  • D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye, and every methine dye can be formed by D. Preferred examples of methine dyes include a cyanine dye, a merocyanine dye, a rhodacyanine dye, a trinuclear merocyanine dye, a holopolar dye, a hemicyanine dye, a styryl dye, etc. These dyes are described in detail in F.M. Harmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Cyanine Dyes and Related Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1964), D.M. Sturmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Special Topics in Heterocyclic Chemistry, Chap. 18, Clause 14, pp. 482 to 515.
  • Formulae (XI), (XII) and (XIII) disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,340,694, columns 21 and 22 are preferred as general formulae of the cyanine, merocyanine and rhodacyanine dyes, respectively. However, the numbers of n12, n15 n17 and n18 are not limited, and they may be an integer of 0 or more (preferably 4 or less).
  • Further, when a cyanine dye is formed by D in formula (I), it can be represented by the following resonance formula:
    Figure 00250001
  • When M is required for neutralizing the ion charge, M is included in the formula for showing the presence of cation or anion. It is depended on the substituent whether a dye is cation or anion, or the dye has a net ion charge or not.
  • Examples of the cation include inorganic ions such as a hydrogen ion, alkali metal ions (e.g., Na, K, and Li ions) and alkaline earth metal ions (e.g., Ca ion) , organic ions such as ammonium ions (e g., ammonium, tetraalkyl ammonium, pyridinium and ethylpyridinium ions) . Examples of the anion may be either of inorganic and organic ions, and include halide ions (fluoride, chloride, bromide and iodide ions), substituted arylsulfonic acid ions (e.g., p-toluen sulfonic acid ion, p-chlorobenzene sulfonic acid ion) , aryldisulfonic acid ions (e.g., 1,3-benzene sulfonic acid ion, 2,6-naphthalenedisulfonic acid ion), alkyl sulfonic acid ions (e.g., methyl sulfuric acid ion), a sufonic acid ion, a thiocyanic acid ion, a perchloric acid ion, a tetrafluoroboric acid ion, a picric acid ion, an acetic acid ion, a trifluoromethane sulfonic acid ion.
  • Examples of the preferred cation include a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a tetraehtylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion, an ethylpyridinium ion and a methylpyridinium ion. Examples of the preferred anion include a perchloric acid, a iodide ion, a bromide ion, and a substituted arylsulfonic acid ion (e.g., p-toluen sulfonic acid ion).
  • m represents a number of 0 or more (preferably 0 to 4) necessary for balancing the charge in the molecule. When the inner salt is formed, the number is 0.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by the following formula (IX), (X), (XI) or (XII):
    Figure 00270001
    wherein Y, R, Z, L1, L2 and p each has the same meaning as in formula (I) ; L11, L12, L13, L14 and L15 each represents a methine group; p11 represents 0 or 1; n11 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3; Y11 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Y11 may further be condensed with other carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; M11 represents a counter ion; m11 represents a number of from 0 to 4 necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; and R11 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group;
    Figure 00280001
    wherein Y, R, Z, L1, L2 and p each has the same meaning as in formula (I) ; L16 and L17 each represents a methine group; n12 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3; Y12 represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring; M12 represents a counter ion; m12 represents a number of from 0 to 4 necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; and R12 represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group;
    Figure 00280002
    wherein Y, R, Z, L1, L2 and p each has the same meaning as in formula (I); L18, L19, L20, L21, L22, L23 and L24 each represents a methine group; p12 represents 0 or 1; n13 and n14 each represents 0, 1, 2 or 3; Y13 and Y14 each represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, provided that Y14 may further be condensed with other carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; M13 represents a counter ion; m13 represents a number of from 0 to 4 necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; and R13 and R14 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group;
    Figure 00290001
    wherein Y, R, Z, L1, L2 and p each has the same meaning as in formula (I); L25, L26, L27, L28, L29, L30 and L31 each represents a methine group; p13 represents 0 or 1; n15 and n16 each represents 0, 1, 2 or 3; Y15 and Y16 each represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, provided that Y15 may further be condensed with other carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; M14 represents a counter ion; m14 represents a number of from 0 to 4 necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; and R15 and R16 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group.
  • The 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring represented by Y11, Y14 or Y15 in formula (IX), (XI) or (XII) may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring. As the carbocyclic ring, a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring, and as the heterocyclic ring, a pyrazine ring and a thiophene ring can be exemplified.
    Specifically, the heterocyclic rings exemplified as the examples of Z1 described later are preferably used.
  • Y12 represents an atomic group necessary to form an acidic nucleus and any form of an acidic nucleus of general merocyanine dyes can be used. An acidic nucleus used in the present invention is defined, for example, by T.H. James, The Theory of the Photographic Process, 4th Ed., p. 198, Macmillan (1977). Specifically, those disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,567,719, 3,575,869, 3,804,634, 3,837,862, 4,002,480, 4,925,777 and JP-A-3-167546 (the term "JP-A" as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent application")can be exemplified.
  • When an acidic nucleus forms a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring comprising carbon, nitrogen and chalcogen (typically, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium) atoms, the following nuclei can be exemplified: 2-pyrazolin-5-one, pyrazolidine-3,5-dione, imidazolin-5-one, hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-iminooxazolidin-4-one, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, isooxazolin-5-one, 2-thiazolin-4-one, thiazolidin-4-one, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, isorhodanine, indane-1,3-dione, thiophen-3-one, thiophen-3-one-1,1-dioxide, indolin-2-one, indolin-3-one, 2-oxoindazolinium, 3-oxoindazolinium, 5,7-dioxo-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[3,2-a]pyrimidine, cyclohexane-1,3-dione, 3,4-dihydroisoquinolin-4-one, 1,3-dioxane-4,6-dione, barbituric acid, 2-thiobarbituric acid, chroman-2,4-dione, indazolin-2-one, pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidine-1,3-dione, pyrazolo[1,5-b]quinazolone, pyrazolo[1,5-a]benzimidazole, pyrazolopyridone, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoline-2,4-dione, 3-oxo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[d]thiophene-1,1-dioxide, and 3-dicyanomethylene-2,3-dihydrobenzo[d]thiophene-1,1-dioxide.
  • Y12 preferably represents hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, barbituric acid, and 2-thiobarbituric acid, more preferably hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, rhodanine, barbituric acid, and 2-thiobarbituric acid, and particularly preferably 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one and rhodanine.
  • The 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring formed by Y13 or Y16 is a heterocyclic ring obtained by eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from the heterocyclic ring formed by Y12, preferably eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, 2-thiooxazoline-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2,4-dione, rhodanine, thiazolidine-2,4-dithione, barbituric acid, or 2-thiobarbituric acid, more preferably eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from hydantoin, 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, rhodanine, barbituric acid, or 2-thiobarbituric acid, and particularly preferably eliminating an oxo group or a thioxo group from 2- or 4-thiohydantoin, 2-oxazolin-5-one, or rhodanine.
  • R11, R12, R13, R14, R15 and R16 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group, and examples of the substituents described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) are preferred.
  • L11, L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, L17, L18, L19, L20, L21, L22, L23, L24, L25, L26, L27, L28, L29, L30 and L31 each represents a methine group, and each methine group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted).
  • Any of L11 to L31 may form a ring together with other methine group, or may form a ring with Y11, Y12, Y13, Y14, Y15 or Y16.
  • n11, n12, n13 and n15 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1. n14 and n16 preferably represents 0 or 1, more preferably 0 . When n11, n12, n13, n14, n15 and n16 each represents 2 or more, a methine group is repeated but it is not necessary to be the same group.
  • p11, p12 and p13 each represents 0 or 1, preferably 0.
  • M11, M12, M13, M14, m11, m12, m13 and m14 each has the same meaning and the same content, as M and m in the methine dye represented by formula (I).
  • The condensed ring containing Y and Z in the methine dye represented by formula (I) is preferably selected from Y-1 to Y-26, provided that Y-1 to Y-26 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocylic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent. Of Y-1 to Y-26, Y-1 to Y-9 are particularly preferred.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by formula (II) or (III).
  • In formula (II), X21 and X22 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and particularly preferably X21 and X22 both represent sulfur atoms.
  • As the substituents represented by V21 and V22, each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted) can be exemplified.
  • V21 and V22 may be linked to form a condensed ring, e.g., a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a naphthalene ring, or a thiophene ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • As the substituents represented by V21 and V22, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred, but it is preferred that V21 and V22 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time. V21 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom. V22 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • The substituent represented by R is preferably a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and particularly preferably a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • In formula (III) , X23 and X24 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and particularly preferably X23 and X24 both represent sulfur atoms.
  • As the substituents represented by V23 and V24, each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted) can be exemplified.
  • V23 and V24 may be linked to form a condensed ring further, e.g., a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, a naphthalene ring, or a thiophene ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring.
  • As the substituents represented by V23 and V24, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred, but it is preferred that V23 and V24 do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time. When X23 represents a sulfur atom, V23 is preferably not a phenyl group and V24 is preferably not a methyl group. V24 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom. V23 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • The substituent represented by R is preferably a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and particularly preferably a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • Themethine dye representedby formula (II) is particularly preferably represented by formula (VII), and the methine dye represented by formula (III) is particularly preferably represented by formula (VIII).
  • In formula (VII), X31 and X32 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. X31 particularly preferably represents a sulfur atom.
  • V31 and V32 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time. As the substituents represented by V31 and V32, each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted) can be exemplified.
  • As the substituents represented by V31 and V32, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred. V31 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom. V32 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • Y31 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring. As the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y31, each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. Y31 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring. The ring formed by Y31 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • R31 and R32 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and each particularly preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • n31 preferably represents 0 or 1.
  • The methine group represented by L32, L33 and L34 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted). L32 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group. When n31 represents 1, L34 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group. The substituents of L33 include an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferred.
  • Examples of M31 include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) . Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • m31 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m31 represents 0. m31 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (VII) is used as a blue-sensitive dye, a preferred combination is a combination in which X31 represents a sulfur atom, X32 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y31 represents a benzene ring, V32 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V31 represents a hydrogen atom, R31 and R32 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n31 represents 0, L32 represents an unsubstituted methine group, M31 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m31 represents 0 or 1. A combination in which V32 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, either R31 or R32 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (VII) is used as a green-sensitive dye or a red-sensitive dye, a preferred combination is a combination in which X31 represents a sulfur atom, X32 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y31 represents a benzene ring, V32 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V31 represents a hydrogen atom, R31 and R32 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n31 represents 1, L32 and L34 each represents an unsubstituted methine group, L33 represents a methine group substituted with a methyl group or an ethyl group, M31 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m31 represents 0 or 1. A combination in which V32 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, either R31 or R32 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • In formula (VIII), X33 and X34 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. X33 particularly preferably represents a sulfur atom.
  • V33 and V34 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent but they do not represent hydrogen atoms at the same time. As the substituents represented by V33 and V34, each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted) can be exemplified.
  • As the substituents represented by V33 and V34, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , a cyano group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, and a methylthio group are preferred. V34 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom. V33 more preferably represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, particularly preferably represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a bromine atom.
  • Y32 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring. As the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y32, each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. Y32 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring. The ring formed by Y32 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • R33 and R34 each is selected from a carboxyalkyl group, a sulfoalkyl group or an alkylsulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, and each particularly preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • n32 preferably represents 0 or 1.
  • The methine group represented by L35, L36 and L37 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted). L35 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group. When n32 represents 1, L37 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group. The substituents of L36 include an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferred.
  • Examples of M33 include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) . Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate andperchlorate ions.
  • m33 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m33 represents 0. m33 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3, more preferably 0 or 1.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (VIII) is used as a blue-sensitive dye, a preferred combination is a combination in which X33 represents a sulfur atom, X34 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y33 represents a benzene ring, V33 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V34 represents a hydrogen atom, R33 and R34 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n32 represents 0, L35 represents an unsubstituted methine group, M32 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m32 represents 0 or 1. A combination in which V33 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, either R33 or R34 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (VIII) is used as a green-sensitive dye or a red-sensitive dye, a preferred combination is a combination in which X33 represents a sulfur atom, X34 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y33 represents a benzene ring, V33 represents a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, or a cyano group, V34 represents a hydrogen atom, R33 and R34 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, n32 represents 1, L35 and L37 each represents an unsubstituted methine group, L36 represents a methine group substituted with a methyl group or an ethyl group, M33 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m33 represents 0 or 1. A combination in which V33 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, either R33 or R34 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (I) is further preferably represented by formula (IV).
  • In formula (IV), X1 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, N-R3, or -La=Lb-, preferably an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, and particularly preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • As the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y1, each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. Y1 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring. The ring formed by Y1 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • The 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring formed by Z1 may be condensed with a carbocyclic ring such as a benzene ring, a cyclohexene ring, or a naphthalene ring, or a heterocyclic ring such as a pyrazine ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring.
  • Preferred examples of the rings represented by Z1 include a thiazoline ring, a thiazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, an oxazoline ring, an oxazole ring, abenzoxazole ring, a selenazoline ring, a selenazole ring, a benzoselenazole ring, a 3,3-dialkylindolenine ring (e.g., 3,3-dimethylindolenine), an imidazoline ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a 2-pyridine ring, a 4-pyridine ring, a 2-quinoline ring, a 4-quinoline ring, a 1-isoquinoline ring, a 3-isoquinoline ring, an imidazo[4,5-b]quinoxaline ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a tetrazole ring, and a pyrimidine ring.
  • Of these, more preferred are a benzoxazole ring, a benzothiazole ring, a benzimidazole ring and a quinoline ring, still more preferred are a benzoxazole ring and a benzothiazole ring, and particularly preferred is a benzothiazole ring. These rings may be substituted with each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R.
  • As the alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group represented by R1, R2 and R3, each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. R1 and R2 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl), an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)), and more preferably represents a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, or a 4-sulfobutyl group.
  • R3 preferably represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, particularly preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • Each methine group represented by La, Lb, L3, L4, L5, L6 and L7 may be substituted or unsubstituted, and examples of the substituents include each substituent described above in the substituted alkyl group represented by R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) (an aryl group, an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfato group, a cyano group, a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, a mercapto group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group, an acylcarbamoyl group, an acylsulfamoyl group, an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group, etc.), and an alkyl group (which may be substituted).
  • La and Lb each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group.
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 or higher, preferably 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, more preferably 0, 1 or 2, and still more preferably 0 or 1.
  • p1 represents 0 or 1, preferably 0.
  • Examples of M1 include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I) . Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • m1 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m1 represents 0. m1 preferably represents 0, 1, 2 or 3.
  • As another form of the methine dye represented by formula (IV), it is preferred that at least one of the atomic group constituting the heterocyclic ring Y1 (exclusive of the substituents on the ring) and X1 contains an oxygen atom. In this case, the X1 moiety may form an oxazole ring, or the Y1 moiety may form a furan ring, an oxazole ring, an isooxazole ring, or a pyran ring. Preferred is the case in which the X1 moiety forms an oxazole ring or the case in which the Y1 moiety form a furan ring.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is used as a blue-sensitive dye, the methine dye is more preferably represented by formula (V).
  • In formula (V) , X3 and X4 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • As the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y4, each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. Y4 may further form a condensed ring with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring. The ring formed by Y4 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably, pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring. Y4 may form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, preferably a benzene ring.
  • As the alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group represented by R4 and R5, each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. R4 and R5 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl) , an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl), or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)), and more preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • Examples of M2 include the same ions as described in M in themethine dye representedby formula (I). Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • m2 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m2 represents 0. m2 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2.
  • A preferred combination in formula (V) is a combination in which X3 and X4 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, Y3 represents a furan ring, Y4 represents a furan ring, a thiophene ring or a benzene ring, R4 and R5 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, M2 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m2 represents 0 or 1, more preferably X3 and X4 each represents a sulfur atom, and R4 and R5 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group. A combination in which either R4 or R5 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (IV) is used as a green-sensitive dye or a red-sensitive dye, the methine dye is more preferably represented by formula (VI).
  • In formula (VI) , X5 and X6 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom, and preferably at least one represents an oxygen atom and the other represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • As the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y5 or Y6, each heterocyclic ring described above in Y of the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. Y5 or Y6 may further form a condensed ring with other 5-or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred not to form the condensed ring. The ring formed by Y5 or Y6 is preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring, and particularly preferably a pyrrole ring, a furan ring or a thiophene ring. Y6 may form a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, preferably a benzene ring.
  • As the alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group represented by R6, R7 and R8, each group described above in R in the methine dye represented by formula (I) can be exemplified. R6 and R7 each preferably represents an alkyl group substituted with a group having an acid radical or a dissociable proton (specifically, a carboxyl group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boric acid group, an alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylcarbonyl), an acylcarbamoyl group (e.g., acetylcarbamoyl), an acylsulfamoyl group (e.g., acetylsulfamoyl) , or an alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (e.g., methanesulfonylsulfamoyl)), and particularly preferably represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • R8 preferably represents an unsubstituted alkyl group, in particular, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
  • Examples of M3 include the same ions as described in M in the methine dye represented by formula (I). Preferred cations include sodium, potassium, triethylammonium, pyridinium and N-ethylpyridinium ions, and preferred anions include bromide, iodide, p-toluenesulfonate and perchlorate ions.
  • m3 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m3 represents 0. m3 preferably represents 0, 1 or 2.
  • A preferred combination in formula (VI) is a combination in which either of X5 or X6 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom, Y5 represents a furan ring or a thiophene ring, Y6 represents a furan ring, a thiophene ring or a benzene ring, R6 and R7 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, R8 represents a methyl group or an ethyl group, M3 represents an inorganic or organic cation, and m3 represents 1, particularly preferably Y5 represents a thiophene ring, Y6 represents a benzene ring, and R6 and R7 each represents a carboxymethyl group, a 2-sulfoethyl group, a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group. A combination in which either R6 or R7 represents a 3-sulfopropyl group or a 4-sulfobutyl group, and the other represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • In the methine dye represented by formula (I), Y preferably represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent.
  • When Y represents a thiophene ring, the thiophene ring may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and the case where the thiophene ring is substituted with at least one substituent is preferred. As the preferred substituents, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl, trifluoromethyl) , an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) can be exemplified, the more preferred substituents are an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl) , an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl) , and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), the further preferred are a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, and a halogen atom, the still more preferred are a cyano group and a halogen atom, the still further preferred is a halogen atom, the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and the most preferred is a chlorine atom.
  • D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye, preferably a group to form a cyanine dye, and more preferably to form a dye represented by the above formula (IX).
  • Here, the preferred structures as Y which represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring are shown below together with the rings including Z:
    Figure 00550001
    wherein Xa represents an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (N-Rw). The furan ring or pyrrole ring moiety may further be substituted, or may be condensed with a ring. The preferred is the case where the furan ring or pyrrole ring moiety is substituted with a monovalent substituent. In the case of (1a) and (1b), the case where only one monovalent substituent substitutes on the carbon atom contiguous to Xa is preferred. In the case of (1c), the case where one monovalent substituent substitutes on at least either one carbon atom contiguous to Xa is preferred. As the preferred substituents, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g. , fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, the more preferred substituents are a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, the still more preferred is a halogen atom, the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and the most preferred is a chlorine atom.
  • Rw represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, a substituted alkyl group or an unsubstituted alkyl group. The substituents of the substituted alkyl group are preferably substituents having higher hydrophilicity than an iodine atom, more preferably substituents having the same or higher hydrophilicity than a chlorine atom, and particularly preferably substituents having the same or higher hydrophilicity than a fluorine atom. Rw more preferably represents a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted alkyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Of (1a), (1b and (1c), (1a) and (1b are preferred.
  • The preferred structures as Y which represents a thiophene ring are shown below together with the rings including Z:
    Figure 00570001
  • In these formulae, the thiophene ring moiety may further be substituted, provided that the thiophene ring moiety is substituted with at least one substituent. In the case of (2a) and (2b), the case where only one monovalent substituent substitutes on the carbon atom contiguous to the S atom is preferred. In the case of (2c), the case where one monovalent substituent substitutes on at least either one carbon atom contiguous to the S atom is preferred. As the preferred substituents , an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl) , and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) can be exemplified, the more preferred substituents are a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group and a halogen atom, the still more preferred are a cyano group and a halogen atom, the still further preferred is a halogen atom, the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and the most preferred is a chlorine atom.
  • Of (2a), (2b) and (2c), (2a) and (2b) are preferred.
  • As described above, it is preferred that a cyanine dye represented by formula (IX) is formed by D, and at this time, the case where at least one of R and R11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is preferred, and the case where both R and R11 represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred.
  • An acid racial is described below. An acid racial is a group having a dissociable proton.
  • Specifically, e.g., a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, a sulfato group, a -CONHSO2- group (sulfonylcarbamoyl, carbonylsulfamoyl), a -CONHCO- group (carbonylcarbamoyl), an -SO2NHSO2- group (sulfonylsulfamoyl), a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a phosphato group, a phosphono group, a phoronic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group which dissociable protons by their pKa and the ambient pH can be exemplified. For example, proton-dissociable groups capable of dissociating 90% or more protons at pH 5 to 11 are preferred.
  • In the cyanine dye represented by formula (I), preferred alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical can be represented by the following formulae:
  • Preferred alkyl group: ―Qa―T1
    T1:
  • -SO3 -
  • -COOH
  • -CONHSO2Ra
  • -SO2NHCORb
  • -CONHCORc
  • -SO2NHSO2Rd
  • wherein Qa represents a linking group (preferably a divalent linking group) necessary to form an alkyl group; and Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd each represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, or an amino group.
  • Qa may be any group so long as it satisfies the above condition, preferably comprised of an atom or an atomic group containing at least one of a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom and an oxygen atom. Qa preferably represents a linking group having from 0 to 10, preferably from 1 to 8, more preferably from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, consisting in combination of one or more of an alkylene group (e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, methyltrimethylene), an alkenylene group (e.g., ethenylene, propenylene), an alkynylene group (e.g., ethynylene, propynylene), an amido group, an ester group, a sulfoamido group, a sulfonic ester group, a ureido group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a thioether group, an ether group, a carbonyl group and -N(Wa)- (Wa represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent).
  • The above linking groups may further be substituted, or may contain a ring (e.g., an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a heterocyclic ring).
  • However, it is more preferred that these linking groups do not contain a hetero ring and that they are not substituted.
  • Still more preferably Qa represents a divalent linking group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms consisting in combination of one or more of an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, pentamethylene, methyltrimethylene), an alkenylene group having from 2 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., ethenylene, propenylene), and an alkynylene group having from 2 to 5 carbon atoms (e.g., ethynylene, propynylene) , and particularly preferably an alkylene group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms (preferably, e.g., methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene).
  • When T1 represents a sulfo group, Qa more preferably represents ethylene, trimethylene, tetramethylene, or methyltrimethylene, and particularly preferably trimethylene. When T1 represents a carboxyl group, Qa more preferably represents methylene, ethylene, or trimethylene, and particularly preferably methylene.
  • When T1 represents -CONHSO2Ra, -SO2NHCORb, -CONHCORc or -SO2NHSO2Rd, Qa more preferably represents methylene, ethylene, or trimethylene, and particularly preferably methylene.
  • Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd each represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, or an amino group, and the following groups can be preferably exemplified.
  • For example, an unsubstituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 10, and more preferably from 1 to 5, carbon atoms (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl) , a substituted alkyl group having from 1 to 18, preferably from 1 to 10, and more preferably from 1 to 5, carbon atoms (e.g., hydroxymethyl, trifluoromethyl, benzyl, carboxyethyl, ethoxycarbonylmethyl, acetylaminomethyl, and an unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 18, more preferably 3 to 10, and particularly preferably from 3 to 5, carbon atoms (e.g., vinyl, ethynyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, benzylidyne, benzylidene) is also included in the substituted alkyl group), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having from 6 to 20, preferably 6 to 15, and more preferably from 6 to 10, carbon atoms (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, p-carboxyphenyl, p-nitrophenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, p-cyanophenyl, m-fluorophenyl, p-tolyl), a heterocyclic group having from 1 to 20, preferably 2 to 10, and more preferably from 4 to 6, carbon atoms, which may be substituted (e.g., pyridyl, 5-methylpyridyl, thienyl, furyl, morpholino, tetrahydrofurfuryl) , an alkoxyl group having from 1 to 10, and preferably 1 to 8, carbon atoms (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, 2-methoxyethoxy, 2-hydroxyethoxy, 2-phenylethoxy), an aryloxy group having from 6 to 20, preferably from 6 to 12, and more preferably from 6 to 10, carbon atoms (e.g., phenoxy, p-methylphenoxy, p-chlorophenoxy, naphthoxy), a heterocyclic oxy group having from 1 to 20, preferably from 3 to 12, and more preferably from 3 to 10, carbon atoms (a heterocyclic oxy group is a group substituted with a heterocyclic group, e.g., 2-thienyloxy, 2-morpholinooxy), and an amino group having from 0 to 20, preferably from 0 to 12, and more preferably from 0 to 8, carbon atoms (e.g., amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, diethylamino, hydroxyethylamino, benzylamino, anilino, diphenylamino, morpholino which forms a ring, pyrrolidino) can be exemplified.
  • Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd each more preferably represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a hydroxyethyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • In acid radicals, carboxyl groups and dissociable nitrogen atoms may be described in a form not dissociated (e.g., COOH, NH) or may be described in a dissociated form (e.g., COO-, N-). A dissociable group practically becomes a dissociating state or a non-dissociating state depending upon the atmosphere such as pH in which the dye is present.
  • When a cation is present as the counter ion, it may be described as, e.g., (COO-, Na+), (N-, Na+). In a non-dissociated state, it is described as (COOH), (NH), but regarding a cationic compound of the counter ion as a proton, it can also be described as (COO-, H+), (N-, H+).
  • In the cyanine dye represented by formula (IX), the case where at least one of R and R11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred, and the case where one of R and R11 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred.
  • The preferred alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group are alkyl groups substituted with a carboxyl group, a -CONHSO2- group, an -SO2NHCO- group, a -CONHCO- group or an -SO2NHSO2- group.
  • The preferred alkyl groups having a sulfo group are a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group and a 2-sulfoethyl group, and the more preferred alkyl group is a 3-sulfopropyl group. As the preferred alkyl groups having an acid radical other than a sulfo group, a carboxymethyl group and a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group are particularly preferred.
  • The preferred combination of R and R11 is the case where either one represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and the other represents a 3-sulfopropyl group, a 4-sulfobutyl group, a 3-sulfobutyl group or a 2-sulfoethyl group, and the more preferred combination is the case where either one represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and the other represents a 3-sulfopropyl group.
  • In the present invention, the methine dye represented by formula (I) is more preferably represented by formula (XX) or (XXX).
  • In formula (XX), Y51 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y51 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • A dye having a furan ring or a pyrrole ring as represented by formula (XX) has particularly excellent photographic performances.
  • The preferred structures as Y51 which represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring are shown below together with the rings including X51:
    Figure 00650001
    wherein Xa has the same meaning as Xa in the above formulae (1a) , (1b) and (1c), which represents an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom (N-Rw) and the similar ones are preferred. Va, Vb, Vc and Vd each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, Va and Vb may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and Va and Vb preferably represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. In the case of (3a) and (3b), the case where Va represents a monovalent substituent and Vb represents a hydrogen atom is preferred. In the case of (3c), the case where at least either Vc or Vd is substituted with a monovalent substituent is preferred. As the preferred substituents, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, the more preferred substituents are a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, the still more preferred is a halogen atom, the particularly preferred are a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and the most preferred is a chlorine atom.
  • Of (3a), (3b) and (3c), (3a) and (3b) are preferred.
  • X51 and X52 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom. The nitrogen atom can be preferably expressed by -N (Rx) - and the carbon atomby -C (Ry) (Rz) -, wherein Rx, Ry andRz each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably the same alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group as represented by R, more preferably the alkyl group. X51 and X52 each preferably represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, and more preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • Y52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y52 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond. Y52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and as the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y52, the heterocyclic rings described in Y in the methine dye represented by formula (I) above can be exemplified, which may further form a condensed ring together with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred that a third condensed ring should not be present. Y52 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, or a thiophene ring (as the pyrrole, furan and thiophene rings, the above-described (1a), (1b), (1c), (2a), (2b), (2c), (3a), (3b), (3c) and the later-described (4a), (4b) and (4c) can be exemplified and the similar ones are preferred), particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and most preferably a benzene ring. The substituents are not limited but preferably an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl) , an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl) , an alkoxyl group (e.g. , methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl) , an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R51 and R52 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group. Similarly to R and R11 described above, the case where at least one of R51 and R52 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is preferred, the case where R51 and R52 both represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred, the case where at least one of R51 and R52, which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical, represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred, and the case where one of R51 and R52 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred. The specific examples of the alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical and the preferred examples of combinations are the same as those described in R and R11 above. The case where R51 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred.
  • L51, L52 and L53 each represents a methine group, which may be a substituted or unsubstituted methine group, and each has the same meaning as L11, L12 and L13 described above. n51 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and more preferably 0 or 1. When n51 represents 2 or more, L52 and L53 are repeated but they may be or may not be the same. When n51 represents 0, L51 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and when n51 represents 1, L51 and L53 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and L52 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl). L52 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group.
  • M51 represents a counter ion and has the same meaning as M described above.
  • The preferred examples of cations include a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a tetraethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion, an ethylpyridinium ion and a methylpyridinium ion. The preferred examples of anions include a perchloric acid ion, an iodide ion, a bromide ion, a substituted arylsulfonic acid ion (e.g., p-toluenesulfonic acid ion).
  • m51 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and when an inner salt is formed, m51 represents 0. m51 preferably represents a number of from 0 to 4.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (XX) is more preferably represented by the following formula (XXI).
    Figure 00690001
    wherein Y71 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y71 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond. X71 and X72 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom. R71 and R72 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group. L71, L72 and L73 each represents a methine group. n71 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. M71 represents a counter ion, and m71 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule. V71, V72, V73 and V74 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Y71 has the same meaning as Y51 described above, and the similar ones are preferred, and two carbon atoms to which Y71 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond. X71 and X72 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, each has the same meaning as X51 and X52 described above, and the similar ones are preferred. R71 and R72 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, each has the same meaning as R51 and R52 described above, and the similar ones are preferred. L71, L72 and L73 each represents a methine group, each has the same meaning as L51, L52 and L53 described above, and the similar ones are preferred. n71 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, preferably 0, 1 or 2, and more preferably 0 or 1. The case where the methine chain represented by =L71- (L72=L73)n71- represents the following LLa or LLb is particularly preferred.
  • Preferred methine chain
  • LLa: =CH-
  • LLb:
    Figure 00710001
  • wherein A represents a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group, preferably an ethyl group.
  • M71 represents a counter ion, and m71 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M71 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V71, V72, V73 and V74 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Of these, two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring. It is preferred that both V71 and V74 represent a hydrogen atom, and V72 and V73 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) . V72 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V73 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a red-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the methine chain (L71, L72, L73, n71) represents the above-described LLb (wherein Apreferably represents an ethyl group) , either X71 or X72 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom, and Y71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • It is preferred that R71 and R72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V71, V72 and V74 represent a hydrogen atom, V73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M71 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m71 represents 0 or 1.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a green-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the methine chain (L71, L72, L73, n71) represents the above-described LLb (wherein A preferably represents an ethyl group), both of X71 and X72 represent an oxygen atom, and Y71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • It is preferred that R71 and R72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V71, V72 and V74 represent a hydrogen atom, V73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 2-thienyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl) , or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M71 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m71 represents 0 or 1.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXI) is used in a blue-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the methine chain (L71, L72, L73, n71) represents the above-described LLa, both of X71 and X72 represent a sulfur atom, and Y71 represents a pyrrole ring or a furan ring substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a chlorine atom or a bromine atom).
  • It is preferred that R71 and R72 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V71, V72 and V74 represent a hydrogen atom, V73 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M71 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m71 represents 0 or 1.
  • In formula (XXX), Y61 represents a thiophene ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one halogen atom, and two carbon atoms to which Y61 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond.
  • A dye having a thiophene ring substituted with at least one halogen atom as represented by formula (XXX) has particularly excellent photographic performances.
  • The preferred structures as Y61 which represents a thiophene are shown below together with the rings including X61:
    Figure 00750001
    wherein Ve, Vf, Vg and Vh each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, provided that at least one of Ve and Vf and at least one of Vg and Vh each represents a halogen atom. In the case of (4a) and (4b), it is preferred that Ve represents a halogen atom and Vf represents a hydrogen atom. In the case of (4c), it is preferred that at least one of Vg and Vh is substituted with a halogen atom.
  • As the above halogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom is preferred, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom is more preferred and a chlorine atom is particularly preferred. As the monovalent substituent, preferably an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl) , and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, and a halogen atom are exemplified, more preferably a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, and a halogen atom are exemplified, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.
  • Of (4a), (4b) and (4c), (4a) and (4b) are preferred.
  • X61 and X62 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom. The nitrogen atom can be preferably expressed by -N (Rx) - and the carbon atomby-C (Ry) (Rz) -, wherein Rx, Ry andRz each represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, preferably the same alkyl group, aryl group or heterocyclic group as represented by R, more preferably the alkyl group. X61 and X62 each preferably represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a nitrogen atom, and more preferably an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • Y62 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y62 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond, preferably a double bond. Y62 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and as the 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring formed by Y62, the heterocyclic rings described in Y in the methine dye represented by formula (I) above can be exemplified, which may further form a condensed ring together with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, but it is preferred that a third condensed ring should not be present. Y62 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyrrole ring, a furan ring, or a thiophene ring (as the pyrrole, furan and thiophene rings, the above-described (1a), (1b), (1c), (2a), (2b), (2c), (3a), (3b), (3c), (4a), (4b) and (4c) can be exemplified and the similar ones are preferred), particularly preferably a benzene ring, a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and most preferably a benzene ring. The substituents are not limited but preferably an alkyl group (e.g., methyl) , an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), and a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) are exemplified, more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group and a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom and a bromine atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R61 and R62 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group. Similarly to R and R11 described above, the case where at least one of R61 and R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is preferred, the case where R61 and R62 both represent an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical is more preferred, the case where at least one of R61 and R62, which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical, represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred, and the case where one of R61 and R62 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is most preferred. The specific examples of the alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical and the preferred examples of combinations are the same as those described in R and R11 above. The case where R61 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is particularly preferred.
  • L61, L62 and L63 each represents a methine group, and each has the same meaning as L51, L52 and L53 described above. n61 represents 0 or 1, preferably 1. When n61 represents 0, L61 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and when n61 represents 1, L61 and L63 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and L62 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl). L62 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group. M61 represents a counter ion, and m61 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is preferably represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII).
  • In formula (XXXI) or (XXXII), V61 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom. Y61, X61, X62, Y62, R61, R62, L61, L62, L63, n61, M61 and m61 each has the same meaning as defined in formula (XXX) and the similar ones are preferred.
  • When n61 represents 0, L61 preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and when n61 represents 1, L61 and L63 each preferably represents an unsubstituted methine group, and L62 preferably represents a methine group substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl). L62 more preferably represents a methine group substituted with an ethyl group.
  • The methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) is preferably represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIb). The methine dye represented by formula (XXXII) is preferably represented by formula (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb), more preferably formula (XXXIIb).
  • In formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa) , V85 represents a halogen atom, X81 and X82 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, R81 and R82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical, V81, V82, V83 and V84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, M81 represents a counter ion, and m81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • V85 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom.
  • R81 and R82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical. Similarly to R and R11 described above, the case where at least one of R81 and R82, which are alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical, represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group is preferred, and the case where one of R81 and R82 represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical other than a sulfo group (preferably a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group) and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group is more preferred. The specific examples of the alkyl groups substituted with an acid radical and the preferred examples of combinations are the same as those described in R and R11 above. The case where one of R81 and R82 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is still more preferred, the case where R81 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is particularly preferred, and the case where R81 represents a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group is most preferred.
  • M81 represents a counter ion, and m81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M81 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V81, V82, V83 and V84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Of these, two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring. It is preferred that both V81 and V84 represent a hydrogen atom, and V82 and V83 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) . V82 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V83 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • In formula (XXXIb) and (XXXIIb), V95 represents a halogen atom, X91 and X92 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, R91 and R92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, A91 represents amethyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group, V91, V92 , V93 and V94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, M91 represents a counter ion, and m91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  • V95 represents a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and particularly preferably a chlorine atom. R91 and R92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, each has the same meaning as R61 and R62 described above, and the similar ones are preferred. A91 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group, preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and particularly preferably an ethyl group.
  • M91 represents a counter ion, and m91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule, and they have the same meaning as M and m described above. It is particularly preferred that M91 represents a cation, and preferred cations are a sodium ion, a potassium ion, a triethylammonium ion, a pyridinium ion and an N-ethylpyridinium ion.
  • V91, V92, V93 and V94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Of these, two contiguous substituents may be linked to each other to form a saturated or unsaturated condensed ring but it is not preferred particularly to form an unsaturated condensed ring in view of photographic performances. Further, it is also preferred not to form a saturated condensed ring. It is preferred that both V91 and V94 represent a hydrogen atom, and V92 and V93 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aromatic heterocyclic group (e.g., 1-pyrrolyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) . V92 more preferably represents a hydrogen atom and V93 more preferably represents a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group, or a halogen atom, still more preferably a halogen atom, particularly preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a red-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the dye is represented by formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb) (A91 preferably represents an ethyl group) , either X91 or X92 represents an oxygen atom and the other represents a sulfur atom, and V95 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • It is preferred that R91 and R92 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V91, V92 and V94 represent a hydrogen atom, V93 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M91 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m91 represents 0 or 1.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a green-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the dye is represented by formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb) (A91 preferably represents an ethyl group) , both of X91 and X92 represent an oxygen atom, and V95 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom.
  • It is preferred that R91 and R92 each represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, all of V91, V92 and V94 represent a hydrogen atom, V93 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M91 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m91 represents 0 or 1.
  • When the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is used in a blue-sensitive emulsion layer, it is preferred that the dye is represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa), both of X81 and X82 represent a sulfur atom, and V85 represents a chlorine atom or a bromine atom. Formula (XXXIa) is preferred to (XXXIIa).
  • R81 and R82 each preferably represents a sulfoalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoylalkyl group, more preferably either R81 or R82 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group, still more preferably either R81 or R82 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, particularly preferably R81 represents a carboxymethyl group or a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group, and most preferably R81 represents a methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl group.
  • All of V81, V82 and V84 represent a hydrogen atom, V83 represents an alkyl group (e.g., methyl), an alkoxyl group (e.g., methoxy) , an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio), a cyano group, an acyl group (e.g., acetyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), or a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine) , more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, an acetyl group, a methoxycarbonyl group or a halogen atom, particularly preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, M81 represents an organic or inorganic monovalent cation, and m81 represents 0 or 1.
  • In general, sensitizing dyes which are less in residual colors are poor in J-associative property and low in sensitivity, but the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are remarkably high in J-associative property and high in sensitivity, although they generate less residual colors.
  • The specific examples of the methine dyes represented by formulae (I) , (II) , (III) , (IV), (V) , (VI) , (VII) , (VIII) , (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) and (XXXIIb) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.
    Figure 00880001
    Figure 00880002
    Figure 00880003
    Figure 00880004
    Figure 00880005
    Figure 00890001
    Figure 00890002
    Figure 00890003
    Figure 00890004
    Figure 00890005
    Figure 00900001
    Figure 00900002
    Figure 00900003
    Figure 00900004
    Figure 00900005
    Figure 00910001
    Figure 00910002
    Figure 00910003
    Figure 00910004
    Figure 00910005
    Figure 00920001
    Figure 00920002
    Figure 00920003
    Figure 00920004
    Figure 00920005
    Figure 00930001
    Figure 00930002
    Figure 00930003
    Figure 00930004
    Figure 00930005
    Figure 00940001
    Figure 00940002
    Figure 00940003
    Figure 00940004
    Figure 00940005
    Figure 00950001
    Figure 00950002
    Figure 00950003
    Figure 00950004
    Figure 00950005
    Figure 00960001
    Figure 00960002
    Figure 00960003
    Figure 00960004
    Figure 00960005
    Figure 00970001
    Figure 00970002
    Figure 00970003
    Figure 00970004
    Figure 00970005
    Figure 00980001
    Figure 00980002
    Figure 00980003
    Figure 00980004
    Figure 00980005
    Figure 00990001
    Figure 00990002
    Figure 00990003
    Figure 00990004
    Figure 00990005
    Figure 01000001
    Figure 01000002
    Figure 01000003
    Figure 01000004
    Figure 01000005
    Figure 01010001
    Figure 01010002
    Figure 01010003
    Figure 01010004
    Figure 01010005
    Figure 01020001
    Figure 01020002
    Figure 01020003
    Figure 01020004
    Figure 01020005
    Figure 01030001
    Figure 01030002
    Figure 01030003
    Figure 01030004
    Figure 01030005
    Figure 01040001
    Figure 01040002
    Figure 01040003
    Figure 01040004
    Figure 01040005
    Figure 01050001
    Figure 01050002
    Figure 01050003
    Figure 01050004
    Figure 01050005
    Figure 01060001
    Figure 01060002
    Figure 01060003
    Figure 01060004
    Figure 01060005
    Figure 01070001
    Figure 01070002
    R1 R2 V
    S-98 CH2CONHSO2CH3 (CH2)3SO3 - Br
    S-99 " " Cl
    S-100 " " F
    S-101 (CH2)3SO3 - CH2CO2H Cl
    S-102 " " Br
    S-103 " " F
    S-104 CH2CO2H (CH2)3SO3 - Br
    Figure 01080001
    X Y Z1 Z2 R M
    S-105 F Y S S CH2CO2H
    S-106 Br O O S (CH2)3SO3 - HN ⁺N(C2H5)3
    S-107 Cl S O S CH2CONHSO2CH3
    S-108 Cl NH O O CH2CO2H
    S-109 Cl S S O (CH2)3SO3 - K+
    S-110 Br S S O (CH2)3SO3 - K+
    S-111 Cl S O O (CH2)3SO3 - Na+
    Figure 01080002
    X Y Z1 Z2 R M
    S-112 Cl O S O CH2CO2H
    S-113 Br O S S (CH2)3SO3 - K+
    S-114 H NH S O CH2CO2H
    S-115 Cl NH S O CH2CONHSO2CH3
    S-116 Cl N-CH3 O S CH2CO2H
    Figure 01090001
    R M
    S-117 (CH2)4SO3 - K+
    S-118 CH2CONHSO2CH3
    S-119 CH2CO2H
    Figure 01100001
    X Y Z1 Z2 R M
    S-120 Cl O S S CH2CO2H
    S-121 Cl NH S S CH2CONHSO2CH3
    S-122 Br S O S (CH2)3SO3 - HN ⁺(C2H5)3
    S-123 Br O S S CH2CO2H
    Figure 01100002
    X Y Z1 Z2 R M
    S-124 Cl S O S CH2CO2H
    S-125 H NH S S (CH2)3SO3 - HN ⁺(C2H5)3
    S-126 Cl NH S S CH2SO2NHCOCH3
    S-127 Br O S S CH2CO2H
    S-128 Cl N-CH3 S O (CH2)4SO3 - HN ⁺(C2H5)3
    Figure 01110001
    X R M
    S-129 Cl (CH2)3SO3 - HN ⁺ (C2H5)3
    S-130 Cl CH2CONHSO2CH3
    S-131 Cl CH2CO2H
    S-132 Br CH2CO2H
    Figure 01120001
    Figure 01120002
    Figure 01120003
    Figure 01120004
    Figure 01130001
    Figure 01130002
    Figure 01130003
    Figure 01140001
    Figure 01140002
    Figure 01140003
    Figure 01140004
    Figure 01140005
    Figure 01150001
    Figure 01150002
    Figure 01160001
    Figure 01160002
    Figure 01160003
    Figure 01170001
    Figure 01170002
  • The methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III), (IV), (V) , (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) for use in the present invention can be synthesized according to the methods described in the following literature.
  • a) F.M. Harmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Cyanine Dyes and Related Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1964)
  • b) D.M. Sturmer, Heterocyclic Compounds - Special Topics in Heterocyclic Chemistry, Chap. 8, Clause 4, pp. 482 to 515, John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1977)
  • c) Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, 2nd Ed., Vol. 4, Part B, Chap. 15, pp. 369 to 422, Elsevier Science Publishing Company Inc., New York (1977)
  • The synthesis of hetero ring as a raw material of the methine dyes represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) for use in the present invention is disclosed
    in literatures such as Bulletin de la Societe Chimique de France, Chap. II, p.150 (1980) and Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry, Chap. 16, p.1563 (1979).
  • For the incorporation of the methine dyes represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) , (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention into the silver halide emulsion of the present invention, they may be directly dispersed in the emulsion, or they may be dissolved in water, a single or mixed solvent of methanol, ethanol, propanol, acetone, methyl cellosolve, 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropanol, 2,2,2-trifluoroethanol, 3-methoxy-1-propanol, 3-methoxy-1-butanol, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, etc., and then added to the emulsion.
  • In addition, various methods can be used for incorporating dyes into the emulsion, for example, a method in which dyes are dissolved in a volatile organic solvent, the solution is dispersed in water or hydrophilic colloid and this dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,469,987, a method in which water-insoluble dyes are dispersed in a water-soluble solvent without being dissolved and this dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-B-46-24185 (the term "JP-B" as used herein means an "examined Japanese patent publication"), a method in which dyes are dissolved in acid and this solution is added to the emulsion, or dyes are added to the emulsion as an aqueous solution coexisting with acid or base as disclosed in JP-B-44-23389, JP-B-44-27555 and JP-B-57-22091, a method in which dyes are added to the emulsion as an aqueous solution or a colloidal dispersion coexisting with a surfactant as disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,822,135 and 4,006,026, a method in which dyes are directly dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid and the dispersion is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-A-53-102733 and JP-A-58-105141, or a method in which dyes are dissolved using a compound capable of red-shifting and the solution is added to the emulsion as disclosed in JP-A-51-74624 can be used. Further, ultrasonic waves can also be used for dissolution.
  • The time of the addition of the methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI) , (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention to the silver halide emulsion of the present invention may be at any stage of the preparation of the emulsion recognized as useful hitherto. For example, they may be added at any stage if it is before coating, i.e., before grain formation stage of silver halide grains and/or before desalting stage, during desalting stage and/or after desalting and before beginning of chemical ripening, as disclosed in U.S. Patents 2,735,766, 3,628,960, 4,183,756, 4,225,666, JP-A-58-184142 and JP-A-60-196749, or immediately before or during chemical ripening, after chemical ripening and before coating as disclosed in JP-A-58-113920. Also, as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,225,666 and JP-A-58-7629, the dyes can be used as a single compound alone or in combination with compounds having foreign structures, and they may be divided and added separately, for example, one part of them is added during grain formation stage and the remaining is added during chemical ripening or after the completion of chemical ripening, otherwise one part is added prior to chemical ripening or during ripening stage and the remaining after completion of chemical ripening. The kinds of compounds added separately and combinations of compounds may be varied.
  • The use amount of the methine dyes represented by formula (I) , (II), (III) , (IV), (V) , (VI) , (VII) , (VIII) , (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention varies in accordance with the shape and the size of silver halide grains, but is preferably from 1×10-2 to 1×10-8 mol per mol of the silver halide.
  • Other sensitizing dyes can be used in combination besides the methine dyes represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII), (XX), (XXI), (XXX), (XXXI), (XXXIa), (XXXIb), (XXXII), (XXXIIa) or (XXXIIb) according to the present invention. Sensitizing dyes are often used in combination, in particular, for the purpose of supersensitization.
    Representative examples thereof are disclosed in U.S. Patents 2,688,545, 2,977,229, 3,397,060, 3,522,052, 3,527,641, 3,617,293, 3,628,964, 3,666,480, 3,672,898, 3,679,428, 3,703,377, 3,769,301, 3,814,609, 3,837,862, 4,026,707, British Patents 1,344,281, 1,507,803, JP-B-43-4936, JP-B-53-12375, JP-A-52-110618 and JP-A-52-109925.
  • Any of silver chloride, silver bromide, silver chlorobromide, silver iodobromide, silver iodochloride, and silver chloroiodobromide can be used as silver halide grains in the silver halide photographic material according to the present invention.
  • The silver halide grains contained in the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention have an average grain size (the grain size herein refers to the diameter of the equivalent circle corresponding to the projected area of the grains, and the number average is taken as the average grain size) of preferably from 0.1 to 2 µm.
  • With respect to the distribution of sizes of these grains, a so-called monodispersed emulsion having a variation coefficient (the value obtained by dividing the standard deviation of the grain size distribution by the average grain size) of 20% or less, preferably 15% or less, and more preferably 10% or less, is preferred. For obtaining a wide latitude, it is also preferred to blend the above described monodispersed emulsions in the same layer or multilayer-coat the monodispersed emulsion.
  • The silver halide grains contained in a photographic emulsion may have a regular crystal form, such as cubic, octahedral or tetradecahedral form, an irregular crystal form, such as spherical or plate-like form, or a composite form of these forms. In the present invention, the grains having the above described regular crystal forms preferably account for 50% or more, preferably 70% or more, and more preferably 90% or more.
  • Further, an emulsion in which the proportion of tabular grains having an average aspect ratio (equivalent-circle diameter/thickness) of 5 or more, preferably 8 or more, to the entire grains exceeds 50% as a projected area can also be preferably used.
  • The emulsion for use in the present invention can be prepared according to the methods disclosed, for example, in P. Glafkides, Chimie et Physique Photographique, Paul Montel (1967), G.F. Duffin, Photographic Emulsion Chemistry, Focal Press (1966), V.L. Zelikman, et al., Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion, Focal Press (1964), and so on. That is, any process, such as an acid process, a neutral process, and an ammoniacal process, can be used. A single jet method, a double jet method, and a combination of them may be used for reacting a soluble silver salt with a soluble halide, and any of these methods can be used. A method in which silver halide grains are formed in the atmosphere of excessive silver ions (a so-called reverse mixing method) may also be used. Further, a so-called controlled double jet method, which is one form of a double jet method, in which the pAg of the liquid phase in which the silver halide is formed is maintained constant, may also be used. According to this method, a silver halide emulsion having a regular crystal form and substantially an almost uniform grain size can be obtained.
  • The silver halide emulsions for use in the present invention are generally chemically sensitized. In chemical sensitization according to the present invention, chemical sensitization using chalcogen sensitizers (typically, sulfur sensitization represented by the addition of labile sulfur compounds, selenium sensitization by selenium compounds, and tellurium sensitization by tellurium compounds can be exemplified), noble metal sensitization represented by gold sensitization, and reduction sensitization are used alone or in combination. The compounds disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, from p. 18, right lower column to p. 22, right upper column are preferably used in the chemical sensitization of the present invention.
  • Various compounds and precursors thereof can be added to the silver halide emulsions of the present invention for the purpose of preventing generation of fog or stabilizingphotographic performances during production, storage or photographic processing of the photographic material. The compounds disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, from pp. 39 to 72 are preferably used. Further, 5-arylamino-1,2,3,4-thiatriazole compounds (the aryl residue has at least one electron attractive group) disclosed in European Patent 0447647 are also preferably used.
  • The silver halide emulsions produced according to the present invention can be used in both color photographic materials, such as color papers, color films for photographing, and color reversal films, and black-and-white photographic materials, such as X-ray films, general films for photographing, and photographic films for printing, and preferably used as color photographic materials.
  • With respect to various techniques and inorganic and organic materials which can be used in the silver halide photographic emulsions, in general, those described in Research Disclosure, No. 308119 (1989), ibid., No. 37038 (1995) can be used.
  • In addition to these, more specifically, for example, techniques and inorganic and organic materials which can be used in the color photographic material to which the silver halide photographic emulsion of the present invention is applicable are disclosed in the following places of EP-A-436938 and the patents cited in the following places.
    Item Place
    1) Layer Constitution line 34, page 146 to line 25, page 147
    2) Silver Halide Emulsion line 26, page 147 to line 12, page 148
    3) Yellow Coupler line 35, page 137 to line 33, page 146, lines 21 to 23, page 149
    4) Magenta Coupler lines 24 to 28, page 149; line 5, page 3 to line 55, page 25 of EP-A- 421453
    5) Cyan Coupler lines 29 to 33, page 149; line 28, page 3 to line 2, page 40 of EP-A- 432804
    6) Polymer Coupler lines 34 to 38, page 149; line 39, page 113 to line 37, page 123 of EP-A-435334
    7) Colored Coupler line 42, page 53 to line 34, page 137, lines 39 to 45, page 149
    8) Other Functional Coupler line 1, page 7 to line 41, page 53, line 46, page 149 to line 3 page 150; line 1, page 3 to line 50, page 29 of EP-A-435334
    9) Preservative lines 25 to 28, page 150
    10) Formalin Scavenger lines 15 to 17, page 149
    11) Other Additives lines 38 to 47, page 153; line 21, page 75 to line 56, page 84 of EP-A- 421453
    12) Dispersion Method lines 4 to 24, page 150
    13) Support line 32 to 34, page 150
    14) Film Thickness, Physical Properties of Film lines 35 to 49, page 150
    15) Color Development Process line 50, page 150 to line 47, page 151
    16) Desilvering Process line 48, page 151 to line 53, page 152
    17) Automatic Processor line 54, page 152 to line 2, page 153
    18) Washing and Stabilizing Processes lines 3 to 37, page 153
  • In the photographic material of the present invention, it is preferred to color a hydrophilic colloid layer for the purpose of preventing irradiation and halation and improving safelight stability. As water-soluble dyes which can be used as such a coloring substance, the dyes capable of decoloration by processing (oxonol dyes and cyanine dyes, above all) disclosed in EP-A-0337490, pages 27 to 76, can be exemplified.
  • A coloring substance disperses regardless of the position where it is added and pervades over the entire constitutional layers of the photographic material by such coloration.
  • Cyan, magenta and yellow couplers are preferably impregnated in a loadable latex polymer (e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,203,716) in the presence (or absence) of the high boiling point organic solvents described in the above table, or dissolved in a polymer insoluble in water but soluble in an organic solvent and emulsified and dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid aqueous solution.
  • Examples of polymers insoluble in water but soluble in an organic solvent which can preferably be used in the present invention include homopolymers or copolymers disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,857,449, from pages 12 to 30. Methacrylate based or acrylamide based polymers are more preferred, in particular, acrylamide based polymers are preferred in the light of color image stability.
  • In the photographic material of the present invention, it is preferred to use color image preservability improving compounds disclosed in EP-A-0277589 in combination with the couplers. In particular, the use in combination with pyrazoloazole couplers or pyrrolotriazole couplers is preferred.
  • That is, the use of the compound disclosed in the above EP Patent which produces a chemically inactive and substantially colorless compound upon chemically bonding with an aromatic amine developing agent remaining after color development processing and/or the compound disclosed in the above EP Patent which produces a chemically inactive and substantially colorless compound upon chemically bonding with the oxidized product of an aromatic amine color developing agent remaining after color development processing, alone or in combination, is preferred for preventing the generation of stain due to the formation of a colored dye caused by the coupling reaction of the coupler with the color developing agent or the oxidized product thereof remaining in the film, or preventing other side reactions, during preservation after processing.
  • The present invention will be illustrated specifically with reference to examples below, but these are not to be construed as limiting the invention.
  • EXAMPLE 1 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-76
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[3,2-d]thiazole was obtained at a yield of 34% by reacting 3-acetylamino-2,5-dibromothiophene (synthesized according to J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1954, 76, 2447) with phosphorous pentasulfide in toluene under heat-reflux.
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[3,2-d]thiazole (2.58 g), 1.61 g of 1,3-propanesultone and 6.4 ml anisole were mixed and stirred with heating at 150°C for 3 hours. After cooling the reaction mixture, the black precipitate generated was washed with acetone, the supernatant was removed by decantation, and 5.21 g of 4-(5-chloro-2-sulfobutylthio-3-benzothiazolio)butanesulfonate and 55 ml of acetonitrile were added thereto, followed by stirring with heating at 100°C.
    Triethylamine (7.7 ml) was added to the reaction mixture and the mixture was refluxed under heating with stirring for 1.5 hours, thereby yellow precipitate was generated. The precipitate was filtered out by cooling with ice, washed with acetonitrile to thereby obtain 2.27 g of yellow powder. The yellow powder was dissolved in 150 ml of methanol, and then the solvent was distilled off to thereby obtain 1.34 g of Methine Dye S-76 as powder. The structure of S-76 was confirmed by 1H-NMR, FAB-MS, and elemental analysis.
    λmax (MeOH) = 435.7 nm ( ε = 7.1×104)
  • EXAMPLE 2 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-31
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[3,2-d]thiazole (1.47 g) , 0.93 g of 1,3-propanesultone and 3.7 ml of anisole were mixed and stirred with heating at 150°C for 3 hours. After cooling the reaction mixture, the black precipitate generated was washed with acetone. The supernatant was removed by decantation, and 3.28 g of 3-[5-chloro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propane-sul fonate and 45 ml of dimethylsulfoxide were added thereto, followed by stirring at room temperature. 1,8-Diazabicyclo [5.4.0]-7-undecene (2.4 ml) was added to the reaction solution and the solution was stirred for 30 minutes, and then 6 ml of acetic acid and 600 ml of ethyl acetate were added thereto, thereby red precipitate was generated. The precipitate was purified by column chromatography, and 1.0 g of potassium acetate was added to methanol solution to distill off the solvent, thereby 1.03 g of Methine Dye S-31 was obtained as green powder. The structure of S-31 was confirmed by 1H-NMR, FAB-MS, and elemental analysis.
    λmax (MeOH) = 524.3 nm ( ε = 7.8×104)
  • EXAMPLE 3 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-85
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole was obtained at a yield of 96% by adding dropwise bromine to 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole (synthesized according to J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1983, 20, 113) in the presence of sodium acetate in an acetic acid solvent.
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[3,2-d]thiazole (9.37 g), 10.37 g of methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl bromide and 12 ml of cumene were mixed and stirred with heating at 150°C for 5 hours. The temperature of the reaction mixture was lowered to 80°C, acetone was added thereto, and the mixture was refluxed for 1 hour. The gray precipitate generated after cooling was filtered out, washed with acetone to thereby obtain 18.45 g of 5-bromo-3-methanesulfonylcarbamoylmethyl-2-methylthieno[2,3-d ]thiazolium bromide as powder. The above-obtained compound (1.80 g), 1.78 g of 4-(5-chloro-2-sulfopropylthio-3-benzothiazolio)propanesulfonate, and 16 ml of acetonitrile were mixed and stirred with heating at 40°C. Triethylamine in an amount of 2 ml was added thereto and the reaction mixture was heated for 1 hour to thereby generate yellow precipitate. After ice-cooling the reaction solution, the precipitate was filtered out, washed with acetonitrile, thereby 1.61 g of yellow powder was obtained. The obtained powder was dissolved in a mixed solvent of 20 ml of methanol, 20 ml of water and 1 ml of triethylamine, and then 3 ml of acetic acid was added thereto, thereby precipitate was generated. The precipitate was filtered out and washed with acetone to obtain 1.24 g of Methine Dye S-85 as powder. The structure of S-85 was confirmed by 1H-NMR, FAB-MS, and elemental analysis.
    λmax (MeOH) = 445.8 nm ( ε = 7.1×104)
  • EXAMPLE 4 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-96
  • 5-Chloro-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole was obtained by making trichloroisocyanuric acid act on the above 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole in a dichloromethane solvent. Yield: 98%.
  • 5-Chloro-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazole (15.2 g), 13.3 g of bromoacetic acid and 24 ml of cumene were mixed and stirred with heating at outer temperature of 135°C for 8 hours. After cooling the reaction mixture, 100 ml of acetone was added thereto. The crystals precipitated were filtered out by suction, washed with 50 ml of acetone, dried under reduced pressure, thereby 15.6 g of 3-carboxymethyl-5-chloro-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]thiazolium bromide (A) was obtained as yellow powder. To 7.4 g of (A), 18.5 g of 3-[5-chloro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propanesulfonate and 70 ml of benzyl alcohol were added and stirred at room temperature. After that, 10.1 ml of 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecene was added to the above mixture and stirred at outer temperature of 50°C for 20 minutes, 1,000 ml of ethyl acetate was then added thereto, a supernatant was removed by decantation to obtain a residue. The residue was dissolved in methanol and refined by Sephadex column chromatography. The refined product was dissolved in 150 ml of methanol, 3 g of potassium acetate was added thereto, after heating under reflux for 10 minutes, the mixture was allowed to be cooled, and the crystals precipitated were filtered out by suction. Methanol (300 ml) was added to the above-obtained powder, and the solution was heated under reflux for 50 minutes, then the solution was concentrated by distilling off 100 ml of the solvent. After cooling, the obtained crystals were recoveredby suction filtration, the filtrate was washed with 50 ml of methanol and dried under reduced pressure, thereby 2.65 g of orange powder of S-96 was obtained. The structure of S-96 was confirmed by 1H-NMR, FAB-MS, and elemental analysis. λmax (MeOH) = 535 nm (ε = 8.3x104)
  • EXAMPLE 5 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-97
  • Orange powder of S-97 was synthesized in the same manner as in Example 4 except for using 3-[5-fluoro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propanesulfonate in place of 3-[5-chloro-2-(2-ethoxy-1-butenyl)-3-benzoxazolio]propanesulfonate. The structure of S-97 was confirmed by 1H-NMR, FAB-MS, and elemental analysis. λmax (MeOH) = 534 nm (ε = 8.2x104)
  • EXAMPLE 6 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-122 Synthesis of 2-Acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene
  • According to the description in Synth. Commun., 1996, 26, 1083, methyl 2-acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene-5-carboxylate was synthesized with chloroacetone, dimethyl acetylene dicarboxylate and sodium hydrosulfide as starting materials (yield: 60%).
  • The above-obtained methyl 2-acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene-5-carboxylate was hydrolyzed with an aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide, the hydrolyzate was heated with copper-quinoline to be decarboxylated, thereby the objective 2-acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene was obtained (yield: 58%).
  • Synthesis of 2-Methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole
  • According to the description in Arch. Pharm., (Weinheim) 1987, 320, 837, oxime was prepared using 2-acetyl-3-hydroxythiophene and hydroxylamine (yield: 88%), and the oxime was further acetylated with acetic anhydride (yield: 69%). The oxime acetate was subjected to treatment with sodium hydroxide in an N,N-dimethylformamide solvent at room temperature, thereby the objective 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole was obtained (yield: 57%).
  • Synthesis of 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole
  • Sodium acetate (1.4 g) and 2 g of 2-methylthieno[2,3-d]-oxazole were dissolved in 24 ml of an acetic acid solvent, and a solution comprised of 15.8 ml of bromine and 7.2 ml of acetic acid was dropwise added thereto with stirring at room temperature. After stirring at room temperature for 2.5 hours, the reaction solution was added to 150 ml of water, followed by further stirring at room temperature for 2 hours. The crystals precipitated were recovered by suction filtration, and dried under reduced pressure, thereby 1.7 g of 5-bromo-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole was obtained as pale yellow powder (yield: 54%).
  • Synthesis of Methine Dye S-122
  • 5-Bromo-2-methylthieno[2,3-d]oxazole (1.53 g) (7 mmol) and 0.94 g of 1,3-propanesultone (7.7 mmol) were heated at 130°C with stirring for 6 hours. After cooling the mixture, 3.1 g of 3-[5-chloro-2-(3-sulfopropyl)thio-1-benzothiazolio]propanesulfonate (7 mmol), 5 ml of dimethyl sulfoxide and 5 ml of acetonitrile were added to the above reaction mixture, and 3.9 ml of triethylamine (28 mmol) was added with stirring at 60°C, and stirring was further continued for 1 hour. The solution was concentrated and refined by column chromatography, thereby 0.51 g of the objective Dye S-122 was obtained. Yield: 10%, λmax (MeOH) = 428.6 nm.
  • EXAMPLE 7 Synthesis of Methine Dye S-125 Synthesis of 2-Methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole
  • According to the description in J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1979, 16, 1563, 4-chloromethyl-2-methylthiazole was synthesized with 1,3-dichloroacetone and thioacetamide as starting materials. The above-obtained 4-chloromethyl-2-methylthiazole was converted to a 4-hydroxymethyl body by dilute sulfuric acid, and then introduced into a 4-formyl body by oxidation of manganese dioxide (yield to this point: 62%). 5-Ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole was obtained by making ethyl azidoacetate act on the above product in the presence of sodium ethoxide and further heating in xylene (yield: 31%).
  • Subsequently, according to the description in Synth. Commun., 1992, 2077, the above-obtained 5-ethoxycarbonyl-2-methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole was hydrolyzed with sodium hydroxide, and then heated in diphenylmethane at 230°C for 3.5 hours, thereby the objective decarboxylated 2-methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole was obtained (yield: 63%).
  • Synthesis of Methine Dye S-125
  • 2-Methylpyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazole (0.70 g) (5 mmol) and 0 . 67 g of 1,3-propanesultone (5.5 mmol) were stirred with heating at 130°C for 6 hours. After cooling, the crystals precipitated were filtered out and washed with acetone, thereby 1.2 g of 3-[2-methyl-1-pyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazolio]propanesulfonate was obtained (yield: 92%).
    3-[5-Chloro-2-(3-sulfopropyl)thio-1-benzothiazolio]propanesulfonate (0.45 g) (1 mmol), 2 ml of dimethyl sulfoxide and 2 ml of acetonitrile were added to 0.26 g of the quaternary salt of 3-[2-methyl-1-pyrrolo[3,2-d]thiazolio]propanesulfonate (1 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 50°C with adding 0.56 ml of triethylamine (4 mmol), followed by further stirring for 1 hour. The solution was concentrated, and then refined with column chromatography, thereby 0.10 g of the objective Methine Dye S-125 was obtained. Yield: 15%, λmax (MeOH) = 447.5 nm.
  • EXAMPLE 8 Preparation of Sample No. 101
  • A multilayer color photographic material was prepared as Sample No. 101 by coating each layer having the following composition on an undercoated cellulose triacetate film support having a thickness of 127 µm. The numeral corresponding to each component indicates the addition weight per m2. The functions of the compounds added are not limited to the use described.
    First Layer: Antihalation Layer
    Black Colloidal Silver      silver amount: 0.28 g
    Gelatin 2.20 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-1 0.27 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-3 0.08 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-4 0.08 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-1 0.29 g
    Coupler C-9 0.12 mg
    Second Layer: Interlayer
    Gelatin 0.38 g
    Compound Cpd-K 5.0 mg
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-2 3.0 mg
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-3 0.06 g
    Dye D-4 10.0 mg
    Third Layer: Interlayer
    Yellow Colloidal Silver      silver amount: 0.007 g
    Gelatin 0.40 g
    Fourth Layer: First Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion A      silver amount: 0.55 g
    Emulsion B      silver amount: 0.23 g
    Surface Fogged Fine Grain Silver Iodobromide Emulsion (average grain size: 0.11 µm)      silver amount: 0.07 g
    Gelatin 1.11 g
    Coupler C-1 0.04 g
    Coupler C-2 0.09 g
    Compound Cpd-A 1.0 mg
    Compound Cpd-E 0.14 g
    Compound Cpd-K 2.0 mg
    Compound Cpd-H 4.4 mg
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.09 g
    Fifth Layer: Second Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion C      silver amount: 0.14 g
    Emulsion D      silver amount: 0.28 g
    Gelatin 0.65 g
    Coupler C-1 0.05 g
    Coupler C-2 0.11 g
    Compound Cpd-E 0.10 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.09 g
    Sixth Layer: Third Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion E      silver amount: 0.50 g
    Gelatin 1.56 g
    Coupler C-3 0.63 g
    Compound Cpd-E 0.11 g
    Additive P-1 0.16 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.04 g
    Seventh Layer: Interlayer
    Gelatin 0.50 g
    Compound Cpd-D 0.04 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-3 0.08 g
    Eighth Layer: Interlayer
    Yellow Colloidal Silver      silver amount: 0.01 g
    Gelatin 1.56 g
    Compound Cpd-A 0.12 g
    Compound Cpd-I 0.04 mg
    Compound Cpd-J 0.07 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-3 0.15 g
    Ninth Layer: First Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion F      silver amount: 0.42 g
    Emulsion G      silver amount: 0.38 g
    Emulsion H      silver amount: 0.32 g
    Surface Fogged Core/Shell Type Fine Grain Silver Bromide Emulsion (average grain size: 0.11 µm)      silver amount: 0.08 g
    Gelatin 1.53 g
    Coupler C-7 0.07 g
    Coupler C-8 0.17 g
    Compound Cpd-B 0.30 mg
    Compound Cpd-C 2.00 mg
    Compound Cpd-K 3.0 mg
    Polymer Latex P-2 0.02 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.10 g
    Tenth Layer: Second Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion I      silver amount: 0.16 g
    Emulsion J      silver amount: 0.34 g
    Gelatin 0.75 g
    Coupler C-4 0.20 g
    Compound Cpd-B 0.03 g
    Polymer Latex P-2 0.01 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.01 g
    Eleventh Layer: Third Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion K      silver amount: 0.44 g
    Gelatin 0.91 g
    Coupler C-4 0.34 g
    Compound Cpd-B 0.06 g
    Polymer Latex P-2 0.01 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.02 g
    Twelfth Layer: Yellow Filter Layer
    Yellow Colloidal Silver      silver amount: 0.02 g
    Gelatin 0.73 g
    Microcrystal Dispersion of Dye E-1 0.24 g
    Compound Cpd-G 0.02 g
    Compound Cpd-J 0.04 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-3 0.08 g
    Polymer M-1 0.23 g
    Thirteenth Layer: First Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion L      silver amount: 0.35 g
    Gelatin 0.55 g
    Coupler C-5 0.20 g
    Coupler C-6 4.00 g
    Coupler C-10 0.02 g
    Compound Cpd-E 0.07 g
    Compound Cpd-K 0.03 mg
    Fourteenth Layer: Second Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion M      silver amount: 0.06 g
    Emulsion N      silver amount: 0.10 g
    Gelatin 0.75 g
    Coupler C-5 0.35 g
    Coupler C-6 5.00 g
    Coupler C-10 0.30 g
    Compound Cpd-E 0.04 g
    Fifteenth Layer: Third Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion O      silver amount: 0.20 g
    Emulsion P      silver amount: 0.02 g
    Gelatin 2.40 g
    Coupler C-6 0.09 g
    Coupler C-10 0.90 g
    Compound Cpd-E 0.09 g
    Compound Cpd-M 0.05 mg
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.40 g
    Additive P-2 0.10 g
    Sixteenth Layer: First Protective Layer
    Gelatin 1.30 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-1 0.10 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-2 0.03 g
    Ultraviolet Absorber U-5 0.20 g
    Compound Cpd-F 0.40 g
    Compound Cpd-J 0.06 g
    Dye D-1 0.01 g
    Dye D-2 0.01 g
    Dye D-3 0.01 g
    Dye D-5 0.01 g
    High Boiling Point Organic Solvent Oil-2 0.37 g
    Seventeenth Layer: Second Protective Layer
    Fine Grain Silver IodobromideEmulsion (average grain size: 0.06 µm, AgI content: 1 mol%)      silver amount: 0.05 g
    Gelatin 1.80 g
    Compound Cpd-L 0.8 mg
    Polymethyl Methacrylate (average particle size: 1.5 µm) 5.00 g
    Copolymer of Methyl Methacrylate/Methacrylic Acid in Proportion of 6/4 (average particle size: 1.5 µm) 0.10 g
    Silicone Oil SO-1 0.030 g
    Surfactant W-2 0.030 g
  • Additives F-1 to F-11 were further added to every emulsion layer in addition to the above components. Moreover, Gelatin Hardener H-1 and Surfactants W-1, W-3, W-4, W-5 and W-6 for coating and emulsifying were added to every layer in addition to the above components.
  • In addition, phenol, 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one, 2-phenoxyethanol, phenethyl alcohol, and p-hydroxybenzoic acid butyl ester were added as antibacterial and antifungal agents. Photosensitive emulsions used in Sample No. 101 are shown in Table 1 below.
    Figure 01450001
    Figure 01460001
  • Preparation of Dispersion of Organic Solid Dispersion Dye
  • Dye E-1 shown below was dispersed according to the following method. That is, water and 70 g of W-4 were added to 1,400 g of a wet cake of the dye containing 30% of water,
    and the mixture was stirred to obtain a slurry having 30% dye concentration. Next, 1,700 ml of zirconia beads having an average diameter of 0.5 mm was filled in an ultravisco mill (UVM-2) manufactured by Imex Co., the slurry was passed and pulverized at a peripheral speed of about 10 m/sec and discharge amount of 0.5 l/min for 8 hours. Beads were removed by filtration and the resulting dispersion was heated at 90°C for 10 hours for stabilization, then water and gelatin were added thereto to dilute the dispersion to dye concentration of 3%. The average grain size of the obtained fine grains of the dye was 0.4 µm and the extent of distribution of grain sizes [(standard deviation of grain sizes)/(average grain size) × 100] was 18%.
  • Preparation of Sample Nos. 100, 102 to 130
  • Sample Nos. 102 to 130 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Sample No. 101 except that Sensitizing Dye Sen-2 or Sen-7 in the emulsions used in Sample No. 101 were replaced in equimolar amount as shown in Tables 2 and 3. Sample No. 100 (i.e., blank sample) was prepared by excluding Sen-2 and Sen-7. Each of the thus-obtained samples was subjected to 20 CMS white light exposure for 1/100 sec. through a gray wedge.
    The exposed sample was processed according to the processing step shown below and sensitometry was carried out.
    Further, residual colors were evaluated by subtracting the yellow stain density and magenta stain density of Sample No. 100, a dye-blank sample, from the yellow stain
    density and magenta stain density of each processed sample. The stain density was measured with densitometer Status A manufactured by X-RITE Co., Ltd.
    Figure 01490001
    Figure 01490002
    Figure 01490003
    Figure 01490004
       numerals indicate weight percentage average molecular weight: about 25,000
    Figure 01500001
    Figure 01500002
    Figure 01500003
    Figure 01510001
    Figure 01510002
    Figure 01510003
    Oil-1   Dibutyl Phthalate
    Oil-2   Tricresyl Phosphate
    Figure 01520001
    Figure 01520002
    Figure 01520003
    Figure 01520004
    Figure 01530001
    Figure 01530002
    Figure 01530003
    Figure 01540001
    Figure 01540002
    Figure 01540003
    Figure 01550001
    Figure 01550002
    Figure 01550003
    Figure 01550004
    Figure 01560001
    Figure 01560002
    Figure 01560003
    Figure 01560004
    Figure 01560005
    Figure 01570001
    Figure 01570002
    Figure 01570003
    Figure 01570004
    Figure 01570005
    Figure 01580001
    Figure 01580002
    Figure 01590001
    Figure 01590002
    Figure 01590003
    Figure 01590004
    Figure 01600001
    Figure 01600002
    Figure 01600003
    Figure 01610001
    Figure 01610002
    Figure 01620001
    Figure 01620002
    Figure 01620003
    Figure 01630001
    Figure 01630002
    Figure 01630003
    Figure 01630004
    Figure 01630005
  • P-2
    Polybutyl acrylate/acrylic acid copolymer in proportion of 95/5
    Figure 01640001
    Figure 01640002
    Figure 01640003
    Figure 01640004
    Figure 01650001
    Figure 01650002
    Figure 01650003
    Processing
    Processing Step Processing Time Processing Temperature Tank Capacity Replenishing Rate
    (min) (°C) (liter) (ml/m2)
    First Development 6 38 12 2,200
    First Washing 2 38 4 7,500
    Reversal 2 38 4 1,100
    Color Development 6 38 12 2,200
    Pre-bleaching 2 38 4 1,100
    Bleaching 6 38 2 220
    Fixing 4 38 8 1,100
    Second Washing 4 38 8 7,500
    Final Rinsing 1 25 2 1,100
  • The composition of each processing solution used was as follows.
    First Developing Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Pentasodium Nitrilo-N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonate 1.5 g 1.5 g
    Pentasodium Diethylene-triaminepentaacetate 2.0 g 2.0 g
    Sodium Sulfite 30 g 30 g
    Potassium Hydroquinone-monosulfonate 20 g 20 g
    Potassium Carbonate 15 g 20 g
    Sodium Bicarbonate 12 g 15 g
    1-Phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidone 1.5 g 2.0 g
    Potassium Bromide 2.5 g 1.4 g
    Potassium Thiocyanate 1.2 g 1.2 g
    Potassium Iodide 2.0 mg -
    Diethylene Glycol 13 g 15 g
    Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml
    pH (adjusted with sulfuric acid or potassium hydroxide) 9.60 9.60
    Reversal Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Pentasodium Nitrilo-N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonate 3.0 g same as the tank solution
    Stannous Chloride 1.0 g
    Dihydrate p-Aminophenol 0.1 g
    Sodium Hydroxide 8 g
    Glacial Acetic Acid 15 ml
    Water to make 1,000 ml
    pH (adjusted with acetic acid or sodium hydroxide) 6.00
    Color Developing Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Pentasodium Nitrilo-N,N,N-trimethylenephosphonate 2.0 g 2.0 g
    Sodium Sulfite 7.0 g 7.0 g
    Trisodium Phosphate Dodecahydrate 36 g 36 g
    Potassium Bromide 1.0 g -
    Potassium Iodide 90 mg -
    Sodium Hydroxide 3.0 g 3.0 g
    Citrazinic Acid 1.5 g 1.5 g
    N-Ethyl-N-(B-methanesulfonamidoethyl) -3-methyl-4-aminoaniline·Sesquisulfate· Monohydrate 11 g 11 g
    3,6-Dithiaoctane-1,8-diol 1.0 g 1.0 g
    Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml
    pH (adjusted with sulfuric acid or potassium hydroxide) 11.80 12.00
    Pre-bleaching Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Disodium Ethylenediamine-tetraacetate Dihydrate 8.0 g 8.0 g
    Sodium Sulfite 6.0 g 8.0 g
    1-Thioglycerol 0.4 g 0.4 g
    Sodium Bisulfite Addition Product of Formaldehyde 30 g 35 g
    Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml
    pH (adjusted with acetic acid or sodium hydroxide) 6.30 6.10
    Bleaching Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Disodium Ethylenediamine-tetraacetate Dihydrate 2.0 g 4.0 g
    Ammonium Ethylenediamine-tetraacetato Ferrate (III) Dihydrate 120 g 240 g
    Potassium Bromide 100 g 200 g
    Ammonium Nitrate 10 g 20 g
    Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml
    pH (adjusted with nitric acid or sodium hydroxide) 5.70 5.50
    Fixing Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    Ammonium Thiosulfate 80 g same as the tank solution
    Sodium Sulfite 5.0 g "
    Sodium Bisulfite 5.0 g "
    Water to make 1,000 ml "
    pH (adjusted with acetic acid or aqueous ammonia) 6.60
    Stabilizing Solution Tank Solution Replenisher
    1,2-Benzisothiazolin-3-one 0.02 g 0.03 g
    Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenyl Ether (average polymerization degree: 10) 0.3 g 0.3 g
    Polymaleic Acid (average molecular weight: 2,000) 0.1 g 0.15 g
    Water to make 1,000 ml 1,000 ml
    pH 7.0 7.0
  • The results of sensitometry and evaluation of residual colors are shown in the following Tables 2 and 3. Relative sensitivities of the blue-sensitive layer and the red-sensitive layer were compared based on the relative exposure amount giving density of minimum density plus 1.0.
    Sample No. Replacement of Sensitizing Dye Sen-7 in Emulsions L to P Relative Sensitivity of Blue-Sensitive Layer Yellow Stain Density
    100 (blank) None - 0 (control)
    101
    (comparison)
    Sen-7 100
    (control)
    0.073
    102
    (comparison)
    Comparative Dye Sen-12 92 0.055
    103
    (comparison)
    Comparative Dye Sen-13 109 0.088
    104 (invention) S-1 113 0.017
    105 (invention) S-2 114 0.028
    106 (invention) S-3 115 0.025
    107 (invention) S-5 115 0.015
    108 (invention) S-6 112 0.018
    109 (invention) S-7 116 0.012
    110 (invention) S-10 125 0.034
    111 (invention) S-15 111 0.020
    112 (invention) S-64 119 0.015
    113 (invention) S-66 124 0.012
    114 (invention) S-76 142 0.0260
    115 (invention) S-78 133 0.018
    116 (invention) S-79 135 0.019
    117 (invention) S-80 140 0.022
    118 (invention) S-81 123 0.013
    119 (invention) S-84 127 0.016
    120 (invention) S-85 125 0.017
    Sample No. Replacement of Sensitizing Dye Sen-2 in Emulsions C to F Relative Sensitivity of Red-Sensitive Layer Magenta Stain Density
    100 (blank) None - 0 (control)
    101
    (comparison)
    Sen-2 100
    (control)
    0.085
    121
    (comparison)
    Comparative
    Dye Sen-10
    92 0.067
    122
    (comparison)
    Comparative
    Dye Sen-11
    83 0.044
    123 (invention) S-31 118 0.031
    124 (invention) S-39 106 0.026
    125 (invention) S-65 117 0.030
    126 (invention) S-69 112 0.020
    127 (invention) S-87 110 0.026
    128 (invention) S-88 125 0.028
    129 (invention) S-89 115 0.021
    130 (invention) S-90 121 0.016
  • As is apparent from the results in Tables 2 and 3, photographic materials showing less residual colors and having high sensitivity can be obtained by using the compounds and emulsions according to the present invention. Above all, excellent effect can be obtained when the methine dyes represented by formula (VII) or (VIII) are used. Thus, it is apparent that high sensitivity and less residual colors are compatible for the first time by using the constitution according to the present invention.
  • EXAMPLE 9 Preparation of Seed Emulsion a
  • An aqueous solution (1,164 ml) comprised of 0.017 g of KBr and 0.4 g of oxidation-processed gelatin having an average molecular weight of 20,000 was stirred with maintaining the temperature at 35°C. An aqueous solution containing 1.6 g of AgNO3, an aqueous solution of KBr and an aqueous solution containing 2.1 g of oxidation-processed gelatin having an average molecular weight of 20,000 were added to the above solution by a triple jet method over 48 seconds. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at 13 mV to the saturated calomel electrode. An aqueous solution of KBr was added thereto, and the silver potential was adjusted to -66 mV, and the temperature was raised to 60°C. After 21 g of succinated gelatin having an average molecular weight of 100,000 was added to the above solution, an aqueous solution containing 5.1 g of NaCl was added. An aqueous solution containing 206.3 g of AgNO3 and an aqueous solution containing KBr were added thereto by a double jet method over 61 minutes with accelerating the flow rate. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -44 mV to the saturated calomel electrode. After desalting, succinated gelatin having an average molecular weight of 100,000 was added to the solution to adjust pH to 5.8 and pAg to 8.8 at 40°C, thus a seed emulsion was obtained. The seed emulsion was tabular grain emulsion containing 1 mol of Ag and 80 g of gelatin per kg of the emulsion, and having an average equivalent-circle diameter of 1.46 µm, an equivalent-circle diametyer variation coefficient of 28%, an average thickness of 0.046 µm, and an average aspect ratio of 32.
  • Formation of Core
  • An aqueous solution (1,200 ml) comprised of 134 g of the above-prepared Seed Emulsion a, 1.9 g of KBr and 22 g of succinated gelatin having an average molecular weight of 100, 000 was stirred with maintaining the temperature at 750C. An aqueous solution containing 43.9 g of AgNO3, an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in another chamber equipped with a magnetic coupling induction stirrer disclosed in JP-A-10-43570, and added to the above emulsion over 25 minutes. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -40 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • Formation of First Shell
  • After the formation of the above core grains, an aqueous solution containing 43.9 g of AgNO3, an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 20 minutes. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -40 mV to the saturated calomel electrode.
  • Formation of Second Shell
  • After the formation of the above first shell, an aqueous solution containing 42.6 g of AgNO3, an aqueous solution containing KBr, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 17 minutes. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at -20 mV to the saturated calomel electrode, and then the temperature was lowered to 55°C.
  • Formation of Third Shell
  • After the formation of the above second shell, the silver potential was adjusted to -55 mV, and an aqueous solution containing 7.1 g of AgNO3, an aqueous solution containing 6.9 g of KI, and an aqueous solution containing gelatin having a molecular weight of 20,000 were mixed just before addition in the same another chamber, and added to the above emulsion over 5 minutes.
  • Formation of Fourth Shell
  • After the formation of the above third shell, an aqueous solution containing 66.4 g of AgNO3 and an aqueous solution containing KBr were added to the above emulsion by a double jet method over 30 minutes at constant flow rate. Potassium iridium hexachloride and yellow prussiate of potash were added en route. At this time, the silver potential was maintained at 30 mV to the saturated calomel electrode. The emulsion was subjected to ordinary washing, and then gelatin was added to adjust pH to 5.8 and pAg to 8.8 at 40°C. The thus-obtained emulsion was designated Emulsion b. Emulsion b was a tabular grain emulsion having an average equivalent-circle diameter of 3.3 µm, an equivalent-circle diameter variation coefficient of 21%, an average thickness of 0.090 µm and an average aspect ratio of 37. Tabular grains having an equivalent-circle diameter of 3.3 µm or more and a thickness of 0.090 µm or less accounted for 70% or more of the entire projected area of Emulsion b.
  • Emulsion b was heated at 56°C, and after the sensitizing dye shown in Table 4 was added in an amount of 1.1x10-3 mol/mol Ag, C-5, potassium thiocyanate, chloroauric acid, sodium thiosulfate and N,N-dimethylselenourea were added and the emulsion was optimally chemically sensitized, and stirred for 60 minutes.
  • The sensitizing dye was used as the solid fine particle dispersion prepared according to the method disclosed in JP-A-11-52507. That is, 0.8 weight parts of sodium nitrate and 3.2 weight parts of sodium sulfate were dissolved in 43 parts of ion exchange water, 13 weight parts of the sensitizing dye was added to the above solution, and dispersed by means of dissolver blades at 2,000 rpm for 20 minutes on the condition of 60°C, thereby a solid dispersion of the sensitizing dye was obtained.
  • Preparation of Coated Sample
  • On a triacetyl cellulose film support having an undercoat layer, the emulsion layer and the protective layer as shown in Table 4 below were coated, and Sample Nos. 201 to 214 shown in Table 5 were prepared.
    Coating Condition of Emulsion
    (1) Emulsion Layer
    Emulsion b (used dye are shown 2.1x10-2 mol/m2
    in Table 5 below) (silver amount)
    Coupler A, B or C shown below 1.5x10-3 mol/m2
    Tricresyl phosphate 1.10 g/m2
    Gelatin 2.30 g/m2
    (2) Protective Layer
    Gelatin 1.80 g/m2
    2,4-Dichloro-6-hydroxy-s-triazine sodium salt 0.08 g/m2
    Figure 01780001
    Figure 01780002
    Figure 01780003
    Figure 01790001
    Figure 01790002
    Figure 01790003
  • Samples shown in Table 5 were subjected to sensitometric exposure for 1/100 sec. and to the following developmentprocess.
    Processing Step
    Processing Step Processing Time Temperature Replenishment Rate Tank Capacity
    (°C) (ml) (liter)
    Color Development 2 min 45 sec 38 33 20
    Bleaching 6 min 30 sec 38 25 40
    Washing 2 min 10 sec 24 1,200 20
    Fixing 4 min 20 sec 38 25 30
    Washing (1) 1 min 05 sec 24 countercurrent system from (2) to (1) 10
    Washing (2) 1 min 00 sec 24 1,200 10
    Stabilization 1 min 05 sec 38 25 10
    Drying 4 min 20 sec 55
  • The composition of each processing solution is described below.
    Color Developing Solution
    Mother Solution Replenisher
    (g) (g)
    Diethylenetriaminepentaacetic Acid 1.0 1.1
    1-Hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic Acid 3.0 3.2
    Sodium Sulfite 4.0 4.4
    Potassium Carbonate 30.0 37.0
    Potassium Bromide 1.4 0.7
    Potassium Iodide 1.5 mg -
    Hydroxylamine Sulfate 2.4 2.8
    4-(N-Ethyl-N-β-hydroxyethylamino)-2-methylaniline Sulfate 4.5 5.5
    Water to make 1.0 l 1.0 l
    pH 10.05 10.05
    Bleaching Solution
    Mother Solution Replenisher
    (g) (g)
    Sodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetato Ferrate Trihydrate 100.0 120.0
    Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate 10.0 11.0
    Ammonium Bromide 140.0 160.0
    Ammonium Nitrate 30.0 35.0
    Aqueous Ammonia (27%) 6.5 ml 4.0 ml
    Water to make 1.0 l 1.0 l
    pH 6.0 5.7
    Fixing Solution
    Mother Solution Replenisher
    (g) (g)
    Sodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate 0.5 0.7
    Sodium Sulfite 7.0 8.0
    Sodium Bisulfite 5.0 5.5
    Aqueous Solution of Ammonium Thiosulfate (70%) 170.0 ml 200.0 ml
    Water to make 1.0 l 1.0 l
    pH 6.7 6.6
    Stabilizing Solution
    Mother Solution Replenisher
    (g) (g)
    Formalin (37%) 2.0 ml 3.0 ml
    Polyoxyethylene-p-monononylphenyl Ether (polymerization degree: 10) 0.3 0.45
    Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate 0.05 0.08
    Water to make 1.0 l 1.0 l
    pH 5.8-8.0 5.8-8.0
  • The density of each processed sample was measured, i.e., Sample Nos. 201 to 206 were measured through a red filter, Sample Nos. 207 to 209 were measured through a green filter, and Sample Nos. 210 to 214 were measured through a blue filter respectively and sensitivity was evaluated.
  • The reciprocal of the exposure amount giving density of fog density + 0.2 is taken as sensitivity, and sensitivity of each sample is shown in a relative value taking the value of Sample No. 201 as 100 with Sample Nos. 201 to 206, taking the value of Sample No. 207 as 100 with Sample Nos. 207 to 209, and taking the value of Sample No. 210 as 100 with Sample Nos. 210 to 214.
  • The sensitizing dye formed a J-association body having absorption maximum at about 605 nm in Sample No. 206, and at about 487 nm in Sample No. 213, and each sensitizing dye showed similar spectral sensitivity distribution to that of absorption.
  • For further evaluating residual colors of sensitizing dyes, samples in Table 5 were subjected to color development processing in the same manner as above (ordinarily processed samples) as one group, and the samples were subjected to sufficient washing processing (that is, the same processing was performed except that the time of washing (2) in the processing step was changed to 30 minutes) to completely remove the remaining sensitizing dyes (washing-processed samples) as the other group, each sample was not subjected to exposure. Since the samples did not undergo exposure, development did not occur and image-forming dyes were not formed.
  • After processing each sample, the spectrum by transmission mode of from 360 to 700 nm of each sample was recorded with a spectrophotometer. After that, for evaluating the remaining sensitizing dye of the ordinarily processed sample, the difference spectrum of the ordinarily processed sample and the washing-processed sample was taken. The absorption of the difference spectrum means the amount of the retained dye, i.e., the residual color of the sensitizing dye. The residual color of each sample is shown in a relative value of the absorbance of the peak wavelength of each sample taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 201 as 100 with Sample Nos. 201 to 206, taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 207 as 100 with Sample Nos. 207 to 209, and taking the absorbance of the peak wavelength of Sample No. 210 as 100 with Sample Nos. 210 to 214.
  • Further, pressure resistance test was performed as follows . A needle having a diameter of 0.1 mm was put on the above sample before exposure and 5 g of load was applied to the needle and the needle was moved at a rate of 600 mm/min. (pressure processing) . The difference in density between the part where pressure processing was performed and the part where pressure processing was not performed (pressure marks) of the sample which had been development-processed without undergoing exposure was measured with a micro-densitometer having an aperture diameter of 10 µm.
  • The results of evaluation of sensitivity, residual color and pressure marks of each sample are shown in Table 5.
    Figure 01860001
  • It can be seen from the results in Table 5 that the samples containing the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are high sensitivity and conspicuously low in residual color as compared with the samples containing comparative dyes. In particular, sensitivity is markedly improved in trimethyl cyanine dyes.
  • The samples containing the sensitizing dyes according to the present invention are also excellent in pressure marks (i.e., pressure resistance).
  • EXAMPLE 10 Preparation of {111} high silver chloride tabular grains (A)
  • To 1.2 liters of water were added 1.0 g of sodium chloride and 2.5 g of inert gelatin and the temperature of the reaction vessel was maintained at 27 °C. An aqueous solution of silver nitrate (75 ml) (containing 18 g of silver nitrate) and 75 ml of an aqueous solution of sodium chloride (containing 6.2 g of sodium chloride and 0.75 g of inert gelatin) were added to the reaction vessel by a double jet method with stirring over 1 minute. One minutes after the completion of addition, 18.6 ml of an aqueous solution containing 0.92 mmol of Crystal Phase Controlling Agent-1 was added to the reaction solution. One minute after that, 450 ml of a 10% aqueous solution of oxidation-processed gelatin was added thereto. Then, the temperature of the reaction vessel was raised to 55 °C over 28 minutes, and ripening was performed for 27 minutes.
  • After ripening, 2.35 mg of sodium benzylthiosulfate was added to the reaction solution. Thereafter, an aqueous solution of silver nitrate (containing 263 g of silver nitrate) and an aqueous solution of NaCl (containing 96 g of NaCl and 0.016 mg of K2IrCl6) were added to the reaction solution at an accelerated flow rate over 32 minutes. At the same time, 2.63 mmol of Crystal Phase Controlling Agent-1 was added at an accelerated flow rate (in proportion to the addition amount of silver nitrate). After that, an aqueous solution of silver nitrate (containing 71 g of silver nitrate) and an NaCl aqueous solution (containing 24.2 g of NaCl, 1.39 g of KI and 12 mg of yellow prussiate of potash) were added to the reaction mixture at an accelerated flow rate over 14 minutes. After addition was finished, the temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 75 °C over 20 minutes, and an aqueous solution of silver nitrate (containing 2.9 g of silver nitrate) and a KBr aqueous solution (containing 2.25 g of KBr) were added to the reaction solution at a constant flow rate over 1 minute.
  • The temperature was lowered to 40 °C and washing was performed according to ordinary flocculation method. After washing, 175 g of inert gelatin, 34 ml of phenoxyethanol (35%) and 700 ml of distilled water were added to the above mixture. pH and pAg were adjusted to 6.2 and 7.5 respectively using sodium hydroxide and an aqueous solution of sodium chloride. Thus, grains (A) was obtained, in which 99% of the entire projected area was occupied by tabular grains having an average equivalent-circle diameter of 0.85 µm and an average thickness of 0.146 µm. The variation coefficient of thickness was 16.8% and the variation coefficient of equivalent-circle diameter was 19.0%.
    Figure 01890001
  • Chemical sensitization
  • Emulsion A was optimally chemically sensitized at 60 °C using Sen-17, Sen-18, Sen-19, S-132 and S-78 shown in Table 6, sodium benzylthiosulfonate, sodium thiocyanate, 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole, sodium thiosulfate and chloroauric acid.
    Figure 01900001
    Figure 01910001
    Figure 01910002
    Figure 01910003
  • Preparation of coated sample and evaluation of photographic properties and stability
  • The surface of a paper support both surfaces of which were laminatedwith polyethylene resin was subjected to corona discharge treatment. The support was provided with a gelatin undercoat layer containing sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate, and further, photographic constitution layers, from the first layer to the seventh layer, described below were coated in order to prepare a silver halide color photographic material samples shown below. The coating solution of each photographic constitution layer was prepared as described below.
  • Preparation of coating solution
  • Each coupler, color image stabilizer and ultraviolet absorber were dissolved in a solvent and ethyl acetate. The solution was emulsified and dispersed in a 10 weight% gelatin aqueous solution containing a surfactant by means of a high speed dissolver, thus an emulsified dispersion was prepared.
  • The above emulsified dispersion and silver chlorobromide emulsion were mixed and dissolved to prepare a coating solution having the composition described below.
  • As the gelatin hardening agent in each layer, 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine sodium salt was used.
  • Further, Ab-1, Ab-2 and Ab-3 were added to each layer so that the total amount became 15.0 mg/m2, 60.0 mg/m2 and 5.0 mg/m2, respectively.
    Figure 01930001
    Figure 01930002
    Figure 01930003
  • High silver chloride emulsion used in each photosensitive emulsion layer was as follows.
  • Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
  • See Table 6.
  • Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
  • To silver chlorobromide emulsion (a cubic form, a mixture in a ratio of 1/3 (silver molar ratio) of a large grain size emulsion having an average grain size of 0.45 µm and a small grain size emulsion having an average grain size of 0.35 µm, variation coefficients of the grain size distribution were 10% and 8%, respectively, emulsions of both sizes contained 0.4 mol% of silver bromide localized at a part of the grain surface and the remaining substrate was comprised of silver chloride), Sensitizing Dye D was added to the large grain size emulsion in an amount of 3.0x10-4 mol per mol of the silver halide and to the small grain size emulsion in an amount of 3.6x10-4 mol per mol of the silver halide, and Sensitizing Dye E was added to the large grain size emulsion in an amount of 4.0x10-5 mol per mol of the silver halide and to the small grain size emulsion in an amount of 2.8x10-4 mol per mol of the silver halide.
    Figure 01940001
    Figure 01940002
  • Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer
  • To silver chlorobromide emulsion (a cubic form, a mixture in a ratio of 1/1 (silver molar ratio) of large grain size emulsion having an average grain size of 0.40 µm and small grain size emulsion having an average grain size of 0.30 µm, variation coefficients of the grain size distribution were 0.09 and 0.11, respectively, emulsions of both sizes contained 0.5 mol% of silver bromide localized at a part of the grain surface, and the remaining substrate was comprised of silver chloride), Sensitizing Dyes G and H were added to the large grain size emulsion each in an amount of 9.0x10-5 mol per mol of the silver halide, and to the small grain size emulsion each in an amount of 1.2x10-5 mol per mol of the silver halide.
  • Further, the following Compound I was added to a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 3.0x10-3 mol per mol of the silver halide.
    Figure 01960001
    Figure 01960002
    Figure 01960003
  • Further, 1-(3-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was added to a blue-sensitive emulsion layer, a green-sensitive emulsion layer and a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 3.3x10-4 mol, 1.0x10-3 mol and 5.9x10-4 mol, respectively, per mol of the silver halide.
  • Further, 1- (3-methylureidophenyl) -5-mercaptotetrazole was added to the second layer, the fourth layer, the sixth layer and the seventh layer in an amount of 0.2 mg/m2, 0.2 mg/m2, 0.6 mg/m2 and 0.1 mg/m2, respectively.
  • Further, 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetraazaindene was added to a blue-sensitive emulsion layer and a green-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 1x10-4 mol and 2x10-4 mol respectively, per mol of the silver halide.
  • Copolymer of methacrylic acid and butyl acrylate (weight ratio: 1/1, average molecular weight: from 200,000 to 400,000) was added to a red-sensitive emulsion layer in an amount of 0.05 g/m2 . Further, disodium catechol-3,5-disulfonate was added to the second layer, the fourth layer and the sixth layer in an amount of 6 mg/m2, 6 mg/m2 and 18 mg/m2, respectively.
  • Moreover, the following dyes were added to emulsion layers for preventing irradiation (the numerals in parentheses represent the coating amount).
    Figure 01980001
    Figure 01980002
    Figure 01980003
    Figure 01980004
  • Layer Constitution
  • The constitution of each layer is described below. The numeral represents the coating amount (g/m2). The numeral for an emulsion represents the coating amount in terms of silver.
  • Support
  • Polyethylene resin-laminated paper [a white pigment (TiO2, content: 16 weight%, ZnO, content: 4 weight%), a brightening agent (13 mg/m2 of 4,4'-bis(5-methylbenzoxazolyl)stilbene), and 96 mg/m2 of a bluish dye (ultramarine) were added to the polyethylene resin of the first layer side].
    First Layer (red-sensitive emulsion layer)
    Emulsion (the above red-sensitive emulsion) 0.12
    Gelatin 0.59
    Cyan Coupler (ExC-1) 0.13
    Cyan Coupler (ExC-2) 0.03
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.01
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-9) 0.04
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-15) 0.19
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-18) 0.04
    Solvent (Solv-5) 0.09
    Second Layer (color mixing preventing layer)
    Gelatin 0.60
    Color Mixing Preventive (Cpd-1) 0.09
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.007
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.007
    Ultraviolet Absorber (UV-C) 0.05
    Solvent (Solv-5) 0.11
    Third Layer (green-sensitive emulsion layer)
    Emulsion (green-sensitive emulsion) 0.14
    Gelatin 0.73
    Magenta Coupler (ExM) 0.15
    Ultraviolet Absorber (UV-A) 0.05
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-2) 0.02
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.008
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.07
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-9) 0.03
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-10) 0.009
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-11) 0.0001
    Solvent (Solv-3) 0.06
    Solvent (Solv-4) 0.11
    Solvent (Solv-5) 0.06
    Fourth Layer (color mixting preventing layer)
    Gelatin 0.48
    Color Mixing Preventive (Cpd-4) 0.07
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.006
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.006
    Ultraviolet Absorber (UV-C) 0.04
    Solvent (Solv-5) 0.09
    Fifth Layer (blue-sensitive emulsion layer)
    Emulsion (see Table 6) 0.24
    Gelatin 1.25
    Yellow Coupler (ExY) 0.57
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-1) 0.07
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-2) 0.04
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-3) 0.07
    Color Image Stabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.02
    Solvent (Solv-1) 0.21
    Sixth Layer (ultraviolet absorbing layer)
    Gelatin 0.32
    Ultraviolet Absorber (UV-C) 0.42
    Solvent (Solv-7) 0.08
    Seventh Layer (protective layer)
    Gelatin 0.70
    Acryl-Modified Copolymer of Polyvinyl Alcohol (modification degree: 17%) 0.04
    Liquid Paraffin 0.01
    Surfactant (Cpd-13) 0.01
    Polydimethylsiloxane 0.01
    Silicon Dioxide 0.003
  • (ExY) Yellow Coupler
  • A mixture (70/30 in the molar ratio) of
    Figure 02030001
    and
    Figure 02030002
  • (ExM) Magenta Coupler
  • A mixture (40/40/20 in the molar ratio) of
    Figure 02040001
    Figure 02040002
    and
    Figure 02040003
    Figure 02040004
  • (ExC-2) Cyan Coupler
  • A mixture (50/25/25 in the molar ratio) of
    Figure 02050001
    Figure 02050002
    and
    Figure 02050003
    Figure 02050004
    number average molecular weight: 60,000
    Figure 02060001
    Figure 02070001
    n = 7 to 8 (average value)
    Figure 02070002
    Figure 02070003
    Figure 02070004
    Figure 02080001
    Figure 02080002
    Figure 02080003
    Figure 02080004
  • (Cpd-13) Surfactant
  • A mixture (7/3 in the molar ratio) of
    Figure 02090001
    and
    Figure 02090002
    Figure 02090003
    Figure 02090004
    Figure 02100001
    Figure 02100002
    Figure 02100003
    Figure 02100004
    Figure 02110001
  • (UV-A)
  • A mixture of UV-1/UV-2/UV-3/UV-4 in the weight ratio of 4/2/2/3
  • (UV-C)
  • A mixture of UV-2/UV-3/UV-6/UV-7 in the weight ratio of 1/1/1/2
    Figure 02110002
    Figure 02110003
    Figure 02120001
  • (Solv-6)
  • A mixture (1/1 in the weight ratio) of
    Figure 02120002
    and
    Figure 02120003
    Figure 02120004
    Figure 02120005
  • Coated Sample Nos. 301 to 304 were prepared by using emulsions shown in Table 6 in the blue-sensitive layer of the photographic material having the above layer constitution.
  • Exposure
  • Gradation exposure by three color separation was performed with laser beams of three colors of B, G and R using the following apparatus. At that time, laser output was modulated so that each sample could obtain appropriate improvement.
  • Exposure Apparatus
  • Three types of laser beams were used as light sources, that is, the wavelength of YAG solid state laser (oscillation wavelength: 946 nm) using a semiconductor laser GaAlAs (oscillation wavelength: 808.5 nm) as an excitation light source converted with SHG crystal of LiNbO3 having reversal domain structure to 473 nm, the wavelength of YVO4 solid state laser (oscillation wavelength: 1,064 nm) using a semiconductor laser GaAlAs (oscillation wavelength: 808.5 nm) as an excitation light source converted with SHG crystal of LiNbO3 having reversal domain structure to 532 nm, and AlGaInP (oscillation wavelength: 680 nm, manufactured by Matsushita Densan Co., Ltd., Type No. LN9R20). Each of three laser beams was made to be able to successively scanning expose a color photographic paper transferring vertically to scanning direction by a polygonal mirror the intensity of which was modulated by AOM. For restraining the fluctuation of light amount due to the changes of temperature, the temperature of semiconductor laser was maintained constant using Peltier element. At this time, scanning exposure was performed at 600 dpi, and every beam diameter of B, G and R measured with a beam diameter meter (1180GP manufactured by Beam Scan Co., U.S.A.) was 65 µm (circular beams showing the difference in diameters in the main scanning direction/sub scanning direction of within 1%).
  • (Development process, dry to dry: 180 seconds)
  • The thus-exposed samples were processed by CP45X processing (manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.).
  • The reflection density of each processed color sample was measured using a TCD type densitometer (manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.). Sensitivity was expressed as the logarithm of the exposure amount required to give color density of fog density + 1.0. Sensitivity of the blue-sensitive layer of each sample is shown in Table 7. In Table 7, sensitivity of each sample is shown in a relative value taking the value of Sample No. 301 as 0.00. A positive value shows that sensitivity is high.
  • Test of pressure marks
  • Pressuremarks (i.e., pressure resistance) testwasperformed as follows. A needle having a diameter of 0.1 mm was put on each of the above samples and 10 g of load was applied to the needle and the needle was moved at a rate of 600 mm/min . (pressure processing).
    The difference in density between the part where pressure processing was performed and the part where pressure processing was not performed (pressure marks) of the sample which had been development-processed without undergoing exposure was measured with a micro-densitometer having an aperture diameter of 10 µm. The results obtained are shown in Table 7.
    Sample No. Grains Blue Light Exposure Pressure Marks Remarks
    Fog Sensitivity
    301 A 0.04 0.00 0.185 Comparison
    302 A 0.04 0.02 0 160 Comparison
    303 A 0.03 0.08 0.090 Invention
    304 A 0.03 0.05 0.105 Invention
  • As can be seen from the results in Table 7, the emulsions according to the present invention are high sensitivity, pressure marks are suppressed and stability is improved.
  • EXAMPLE 11
  • A tabular silver iodobromide emulsion was prepared according to the method of preparing Emulsion D in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904 and this was designated Emulsion Q.
  • Multilayer color photographic materials were prepared according to the method of preparation of Sample No. 101 in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904. Sample Nos. 401 and 402 were prepared by replacing Emulsion D in the fifth layer of Sample No. 101 in Example 5 of JP-A-8-29904 with Emulsion Q, and further replacing ExS-1, 2 and 3 with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (5.0×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (5.0×10-4 mol/Ag mol).
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, each sample was exposed for 1/100 sec. through an optical wedge and a red filter with Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), color development processing was performed using the same processing step and processing solutions as in Example 1 of JP-A-8-29904 and cyan density was measured. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give density of fog density + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value.
  • As a result, Sample No. 402 according to the present invention showed high sensitivity of 113 as compared with sensitivity 100 (control) of comparative Sample No. 401. Sample No. 402 also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 12
  • In Emulsion 1 in Example 1 of JP-A-7-92601, the spectral sensitizing dyes were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (8×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (8×10-4 mol/Ag mol) to prepare tetradecahedral silver iodobromide emulsions, the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion R and Emulsion S. Further, in Emulsion 1 in Example 1 of JP-A-7-92601, the silver potential during the second double jet was changed from +65 mV to +115 mV, further, the spectral sensitizing dyes were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (8×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (8×10-4 mol/Ag mol) to prepare cubic silver iodobromide emulsions, the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion T and Emulsion U.
  • Multilayer color photographic materials were prepared according to the method of preparation of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601. Emulsion 1 in the ninth layer of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601 was replaced with Emulsion R or Emulsion S, the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 411 and 412. Similarly, Emulsion 1 in the ninth layer of Sample No. 401 in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601 was replaced with Emulsion T or Emulsion U, and these samples were designated Sample Nos. 413 and 414.
  • The sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples was evaluated. In the same manner as in Example 4 of JP-A-7-92601, samples were subjected to exposure for 1/50 sec. and color reversal development processing, and magenta density was measured. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give density of minimum density + 0.2 which was obtained with sufficient exposure and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 411 as 100. As a result, Sample No. 412 according to the present invention showed high sensitivity of 129. Sample No. 412 also showed less residual colors after processing. Further, Sample No. 414 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 133 taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 413 as 100. Sample No. 414 also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 13
  • Octahedral silver bromide internal latent image type direct positive emulsion and hexagonal tabular silver bromide internal latent image type direct positive emulsion were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsions 1 and 5 in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297 and these emulsions were named Emulsion V and Emulsion W.
  • Color diffusion transfer photographic films were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Sample No. 101 in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297. In the sixteenth layer of Sample No. 101 in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297, Emulsion-2 was replaced with Emulsion V and Sensitizing Dye (3) was replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (9×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (9×10-4mol/Agmol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 421 and 422. Also, in the eleventh layer of Sample No. 101 in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297, Emulsion-2 was replaced with Emulsion W and Sensitizing Dye (2) was replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10(9×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (9×10-4mol/Agmol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 423 and 424
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, processing was carried out using the same exposure, processing step and processing solutions as in Example 1 of JP-A-5-313297 and transfer density was measured using a color densitometer. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give density of 1.0 and expressed as a relative value. The sensitivity of Sample No. 422 according to the present invention was as high as 123 taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 421 as 100. Sample No. 422 also showed less residual colors after processing. Also, the sensitivity of Sample No. 424 according to the present invention was as high as 115 taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 423 as 100. Sample No. 424 also showed less residual colors after processing
  • EXAMPLE 14
  • In the preparation of Emulsion F in Example 2 of JP-A-4-142536, red-sensitive sensitizing dye (S-1) was not added before sulfur sensitization, in addition to sulfur sensitization using triethylthiourea, chloroauric acid was used in combination and optimally gold-sulfur sensitized, and after gold-sulfur sensitization, Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (2×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (2×10-4 mol/Ag mol) was added, the thus-obtained silver chlorobromide emulsions were designated Emulsions X and Y.
  • Multilayer color photographic papers were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Sample No. 20 in Example 1 of JP-A-6-347944. The emulsion in the fifth layer of Sample No. 20 in Example 1 of JP-A-6-347944 was replaced with Emulsion X or Y, these samples were designated Sample Nos. 431 and 432.
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, samples were exposed for 1/10 sec. through an optical wedge and a red filter with Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), color development processing was carried out using the same processing step and processing solutions as in Example 1 of JP-A-6-347944. As a result, Sample No. 432 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 136 taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 431 as 100. Sample No. 432 also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 15
  • Tabular silver chloride emulsions were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion A in Example 1 of JP-A-8-122954. In chemical sensitization (B) in Example 1 of the same patent, Sensitizing Dye-1 and Dye-2 were replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-10 (2×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-31 (2×10-4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained emulsions were designated Emulsion ZA and Emulsion ZB.
  • Coated samples were prepared by replacing the emulsion in Example 1 of JP-A-8-122954 with Emulsion ZA or Emulsion ZB and an emulsion layer and a surface protective layer were coated in combination on both sides of the support by a simultaneous extrusion method similar to in Example 1, these samples were designated Sample Nos. 441 and 442. The coated silver amount per one side was 1.75 g/m2.
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, samples were exposed for 0.05 sec. from both sides through an X-ray ortho-screen HGM produced by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. and processed with the same automatic processor and processing solutions as in Example 1 of JP-A-8-122954. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.1 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 441 as 100. As a result, Sample No. 442 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 120, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • When exposure was performed using HR-4 or HGH in place of X-ray ortho-screen HGM, the same effects could be obtained.
  • EXAMPLE 16
  • Tabular silver chloride emulsion was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion D in Example 2 of JP-A-8-227117 except that Sensitizing Dye-2 and Dye-3 were not added. This emulsion was designated Emulsion ZC.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Coated Sample No. Fin Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117. Emulsion F in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117 was replaced with Emulsion ZC, and Sensitizing Dye-1 in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 was replaced with Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (5×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (5×10-4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 451 and 452.
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, samples were exposed for 1/100 second through an optical wedge and a blue filter using Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), subjected to Fuji Photo Film CN16 processing and photographic characteristics were compared.
  • Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Comparative Sample No. 451 as 100. Sample No. 452 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 124, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 17
  • Octahedral silver chloride emulsion was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117, this was designated Emulsion ZD.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117. Emulsion F and Sensitizing Dye-1 in Coated Sample No. F in Example 3 of JP-A-8-227117 were replaced with Emulsion ZD and Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 (5×10-4 mol/Ag mol) or Sensitizing Dye S-76 (5×10-4 mol/Ag mol), the thus-obtained samples were designated Sample Nos. 461 and 462.
  • For examining the sensitivity of the thus-obtained samples, samples were subjected to exposure for 1/100 sec. through an optical wedge and a red filter using Fuji FW type sensitometer (a product of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.), subjected to Fuji Photo Film CN16 processing and photographic characteristics were compared. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Sample No. 461 as 100. Sample No. 462 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 129, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 18
  • Tabular grain emulsions were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Emulsion CC disclosed in European Patent 0699950, and in chemical sensitization Sensitizing Dye Sen-12 was added in an amount of 5×10-4mol/Agmol and chemical sensitization was performed, then Sen-12 was added in an amount of 3×10-4 mol/Ag mol, thereafter, further, Sen-12 was added in an amount of 3×10-4 mol/Ag mol, this emulsion was designated Emulsion ZE, or S-76 was addedin an amount of 5×10-4 mol/Agmol and chemical sensitization was performed, then S-76 was added in an amount of 3×10-4 mol/Ag mol, thereafter, further, S-76 was added in an amount of 3×10-4 mol/Ag mol, this emulsion was designated Emulsion ZF.
  • Coated samples were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of the coated samples in the example of European Patent 0699950, and a sample in which Emulsion ZE was used was designated Sample No. 471, and ZF was used was designated Sample No. 472. The thus-prepared samples were subjected to exposure and development in the same manner as in European Patent 0699950 and photographic characteristics were compared. Sensitivity was a reciprocal of exposure amount required to give a density of fog + 0.2 and expressed as a relative value taking the sensitivity of Sample No. 471 as 100. Sample No. 472 according to the present invention showed such high sensitivity of 136, and also showed less residual colors after processing.
  • EXAMPLE 19 Preparation of Sample No. 501
  • Sample No. 101 in Example 8 was prepared and designated Sample No. 501.
  • Preparation of Sample Nos. 500, 502 to 516
  • Sample Nos. 502 to 516 were prepared by replacing sensitizing dye Sen-2 or Sen-7 used in the emulsion of Sample No. 501 with equimolar amount of the dye shown in Table 8 and Table 9, and Sample No. 500 (blank sample) was prepared by excluding both dyes. Each piece of the samples thus obtained was subjected to 20 CMS white light exposure for 1/100 sec. through a gray wedge, then processed by the same processing step and same processing solutions as in Example 8, and sensitometry was performed.
  • The yellow stain density and the magenta stain density of blank Sample No. 500 were subtracted from the yellow stain density and magenta stain density of each piece of the samples after processing and residual color was evaluated. The stain density was measured using a densitometer Status A, a product of X-RITE Co.
  • Sensitometry and the results of evaluation of residual color are shown in Tables 8 and 9 below. BL relative sensitivity and RL relative sensitivity were compared on the basis of relative exposure amount giving minimum density + 1.0.
    Sample No. Sensitizing Dye in Emulsions L to P and Replacement of Sen-7 Relative Sensitivity of Blue-Sensitive Layer Yellow Stain Density
    500 (blank) None - 0 (criterion)
    501 (Comparison) Sen-7 100 (criterion) 0.073
    502 (Comparison) Comparative
    Dye Sen-12
    92 0.055
    503 (Comparison) Comparative
    Dye Sen-13
    109 0.088
    504 (Invention) S-139 113 0.022
    505 (Invention) S-145 126 0.032
    506 (Invention) S-148 124 0.035
    507 (Invention) S-154 122 0.017
    508 (Invention) S-156 134 0.044
    509 (Invention) S-157 130 0.033
    510 (Invention) S-158 125 0.036
    Sample No. Sensitizing Dye in Emulsions C to E and Replacement of Sen-2 Relative Sensitivity of Red-Sensitive Layer Magenta Stain Density
    500 (blank) None - 0 (criterion)
    501 (Comparison) Sen-2 100 (criterion) 0.085
    511 (Comparison) Comparative
    Dye Sen-10
    92 0.067
    512 (Comparison) Comparative
    Dye Sen-11
    83 0.044
    513 (Invention) S-150 118 0.025
    514 (Invention) S-151 128 0.038
    515 (Invention) S-152 125 0.026
    516 (Invention) S-155 130 0.032
  • As is apparent from the results in Tables 8 and 9, photographic materials exhibiting less residual color and high sensitivity by using the compounds and emulsions according to the present invention, above all, excellent effect can be obtained when the methine dye represented by formula (VII) or (VIII) is used. Thus, high sensitivity is compatible with less residual color for the first time by using the constitution of the present invention.
  • EFFECT OF THE INVENTION
  • High sensitivity and excellent residual color effect can be obtained by the constitution of the present invention.
  • While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific examples thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.

Claims (10)

  1. A silver halide photographic material which comprises at least one methine dye represented by the following formula (I):
    Figure 02290001
    wherein Y represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring, and Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a single bond or a double bond; Z represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye; L1 and L2 each represents a methine group; p represents 0 or 1; M represents a counter ion; and m represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  2. A silver halide photographic material which comprises at least one methine dye represented by the following formula (I) :
    Figure 02300001
    wherein Y represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a single bond or a double bond; Z represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye; L1 and L2 each represents a methine group; p represents 0 or 1; M represents a counter ion; andm represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule; wherein the condensed ring containing Y and Z in the methine dye represented by formula (I) is selected from the following Y-1 to Y-26, provided that Y-1 to Y-3 and Y-6 to Y-26 may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocylic or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent:
    Figure 02310001
    Figure 02310002
    Figure 02310003
    Figure 02310004
    Figure 02310005
    Figure 02310006
    Figure 02310007
    in each structural formula, * represents a position to link to a methine chain.
  3. A silver halide photographic material which comprises at least one methine dye represented by the following formula (I) :
    Figure 02320001
    wherein Y represents a thiophene ring in which at least one halogen atom is substituted, and Y may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring, or may have a substituent; the bond between two carbon atoms in which Y is condensed may be a single bond or a double bond; Z represents an atomic group necessary to form a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, and Z may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring; R represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; D represents a group necessary to form a methine dye; L1 and L2 each represents a methine group; p represents 0 or 1; M represents a counter ion; andm represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  4. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (XX):
    Figure 02330001
    wherein Y51 represents a furan ring or a pyrrole ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y51 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; X51 and X52 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom; Y52 represents an atomic group necessary to form a benzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may further be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y52 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; R51 and R52 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; L51, L52 and L53 each represents a methine group; n51 represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; M51 represents a counter ion; and m51 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  5. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 3, wherein the methine dye represented by formula (I) is represented by the following formula (XXX) :
    Figure 02340001
    wherein Y61 represents a thiophene ring which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent but is substituted with at least one halogen atom, and two carbon atoms to which Y61 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; X61 and X62 each represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a selenium atom, a tellurium atom, a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom; Y62 represents an atomic group necessary to form abenzene ring or a 5- or 6-membered unsaturated heterocyclic ring, which may be condensed with other 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or may have a substituent, and two carbon atoms to which Y62 is condensed may be bonded by a single bond or a double bond; R61 and R62 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; L61, L62 and L63 each represents a methine group; n61 represents 0 or 1; M61 represents a counter ion; and m61 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  6. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 5, wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXX) is represented by the following formula (XXXI) or (XXXII):
    Figure 02350001
    Figure 02350002
    wherein L61, L62 and L63 each represents a methine group; V61 represents a halogen atom; X61, X62, Y62, R61, R62, L61, L62, L63, n61, M61 and m61 each has the same meaning as defined in formula (XXX) in claim 5.
  7. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 6, wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII) is represented by the following formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa):
    Figure 02360001
    Figure 02360002
    wherein V85 represents a halogen atom; X81 and X82 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; R81 and R82 each represents an alkyl group substituted with an acid radical; V81, V82, V83 and V84 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; M81 represents a counter ion; and m81 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  8. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 7, wherein in the methine dye represented by formula (XXXIa) or (XXXIIa), at least either R81 or R82 represents an alkyl group substituted with a carboxyl group or an alkanesulfonylcarbamoyl group, and the other represents an alkyl group substituted with a sulfo group.
  9. The silver halide photographic material as claimed in claim 6, wherein the methine dye represented by formula (XXXI) or (XXXII) is represented by the following formula (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb):
    Figure 02370001
    Figure 02370002
    wherein V95 represents a halogen atom; X91 and X92 each represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; R91 and R92 each represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group; A91 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group or a propyl group; V91, V92, V93 and V94 each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; M91 represents a counter ion; and m91 represents a number of 0 or higher necessary to neutralize the charge in the molecule.
  10. A methine dye represented by formula (XXXIa), (XXXIla), (XXXIb) or (XXXIIb).
EP01124350A 2001-04-17 2001-10-23 Silver halide photographic material containing a methine dye Expired - Lifetime EP1251395B1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2001118281 2001-04-17
JP2001118281A JP2002023295A (en) 2000-04-25 2001-04-17 Silver halide photosensitive material and methine dye

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP1251395A1 true EP1251395A1 (en) 2002-10-23
EP1251395B1 EP1251395B1 (en) 2010-09-29

Family

ID=18968697

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP01124350A Expired - Lifetime EP1251395B1 (en) 2001-04-17 2001-10-23 Silver halide photographic material containing a methine dye

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1251395B1 (en)
AT (1) ATE483182T1 (en)
DE (1) DE60143154D1 (en)

Citations (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2735766A (en) 1952-05-15 1956-02-21 Prevention of dye wandering in
US3469987A (en) 1965-06-21 1969-09-30 Eastman Kodak Co Method of spectrally sensitizing photographic silver halide emulsions
US3628960A (en) 1967-04-21 1971-12-21 Agfa Gevaert Nv Light sensitive halide material with variable contrast
US3822135A (en) 1970-12-10 1974-07-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Process for producing photographic emulsions
JPS5174624A (en) 1974-12-24 1976-06-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
US4006026A (en) 1973-02-21 1977-02-01 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Method of improving the tarnish resistance of silver
JPS53102733A (en) 1977-02-18 1978-09-07 Ciba Geigy Ag Production method of photographic material
US4183756A (en) 1978-05-03 1980-01-15 Eastman Kodak Company Pre-precipitation spectral sensitizing dye addition process
US4203716A (en) 1976-11-24 1980-05-20 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic elements having hydrophilic colloid layers containing hydrophobic addenda uniformly loaded in latex polymer particles
JPS5722091B2 (en) 1973-11-15 1982-05-11
JPS587629A (en) 1981-07-07 1983-01-17 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Manufacture of photosensitive silver halide material
JPS58105141A (en) 1981-12-17 1983-06-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of silver halide emulsion
JPS58113920A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-07 Nippon Kogaku Kk <Nikon> Single-lens reflex camera having photometric device
JPS58184142A (en) 1982-04-22 1983-10-27 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Preparation of silver halide emulsion
JPS60196749A (en) 1984-03-21 1985-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Preparation of silver halide photographic emulsion
JPS61272735A (en) * 1985-05-28 1986-12-03 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61277950A (en) * 1985-06-01 1986-12-08 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61279851A (en) * 1985-06-05 1986-12-10 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61282834A (en) * 1985-06-08 1986-12-13 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Silver halide photographic sensitive material
JPS62215272A (en) 1986-02-17 1987-09-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Color image forming method
EP0277589A2 (en) 1987-01-28 1988-08-10 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Color photographs, a process for preparing them and color photographic materials employed therefor
US4857449A (en) 1987-02-23 1989-08-15 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide color photographic photosensitive materials
EP0337490A2 (en) 1988-04-15 1989-10-18 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide light-sensitive photographic material
EP0341958A2 (en) * 1988-05-07 1989-11-15 Konica Corporation Silver halide photographic material
JPH04142536A (en) 1990-10-04 1992-05-15 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color photographic sensitive material
JPH05313297A (en) 1992-05-11 1993-11-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Direct positive silver halide emulsion and color diffusion transfer photographic film using same
JPH06347944A (en) 1993-06-02 1994-12-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color photographic sensitive material and color image forming method
JPH0792601A (en) 1993-09-20 1995-04-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide photographic sensitive material
JPH0829904A (en) 1994-07-20 1996-02-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of silver halide photographic emulsion
EP0699950A1 (en) 1994-08-26 1996-03-06 Eastman Kodak Company Ultrathin tabular grain emulsions with novel dopant management
JPH08122954A (en) 1994-08-30 1996-05-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide emulsion and photosensitive material using the emulsion
JPH08227117A (en) 1994-12-19 1996-09-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of photographic silver halide emulsion
JPH1043570A (en) 1996-08-06 1998-02-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Agitator
JPH1152507A (en) 1997-07-31 1999-02-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method for dispersing spectral sensitizer and dispersion obtained by the same
EP1139164A1 (en) 2000-03-27 2001-10-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide photographic material

Patent Citations (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2735766A (en) 1952-05-15 1956-02-21 Prevention of dye wandering in
US3469987A (en) 1965-06-21 1969-09-30 Eastman Kodak Co Method of spectrally sensitizing photographic silver halide emulsions
US3628960A (en) 1967-04-21 1971-12-21 Agfa Gevaert Nv Light sensitive halide material with variable contrast
US3822135A (en) 1970-12-10 1974-07-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Process for producing photographic emulsions
US4006026A (en) 1973-02-21 1977-02-01 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Method of improving the tarnish resistance of silver
JPS5722091B2 (en) 1973-11-15 1982-05-11
JPS5174624A (en) 1974-12-24 1976-06-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
US4203716A (en) 1976-11-24 1980-05-20 Eastman Kodak Company Photographic elements having hydrophilic colloid layers containing hydrophobic addenda uniformly loaded in latex polymer particles
JPS53102733A (en) 1977-02-18 1978-09-07 Ciba Geigy Ag Production method of photographic material
US4183756A (en) 1978-05-03 1980-01-15 Eastman Kodak Company Pre-precipitation spectral sensitizing dye addition process
JPS587629A (en) 1981-07-07 1983-01-17 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Manufacture of photosensitive silver halide material
JPS58105141A (en) 1981-12-17 1983-06-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of silver halide emulsion
JPS58113920A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-07 Nippon Kogaku Kk <Nikon> Single-lens reflex camera having photometric device
JPS58184142A (en) 1982-04-22 1983-10-27 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Preparation of silver halide emulsion
JPS60196749A (en) 1984-03-21 1985-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Preparation of silver halide photographic emulsion
JPS61272735A (en) * 1985-05-28 1986-12-03 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61277950A (en) * 1985-06-01 1986-12-08 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61279851A (en) * 1985-06-05 1986-12-10 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Photographic element
JPS61282834A (en) * 1985-06-08 1986-12-13 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Silver halide photographic sensitive material
JPS62215272A (en) 1986-02-17 1987-09-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Color image forming method
EP0277589A2 (en) 1987-01-28 1988-08-10 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Color photographs, a process for preparing them and color photographic materials employed therefor
US4857449A (en) 1987-02-23 1989-08-15 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide color photographic photosensitive materials
EP0337490A2 (en) 1988-04-15 1989-10-18 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide light-sensitive photographic material
EP0341958A2 (en) * 1988-05-07 1989-11-15 Konica Corporation Silver halide photographic material
JPH04142536A (en) 1990-10-04 1992-05-15 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color photographic sensitive material
JPH05313297A (en) 1992-05-11 1993-11-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Direct positive silver halide emulsion and color diffusion transfer photographic film using same
JPH06347944A (en) 1993-06-02 1994-12-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide color photographic sensitive material and color image forming method
JPH0792601A (en) 1993-09-20 1995-04-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide photographic sensitive material
JPH0829904A (en) 1994-07-20 1996-02-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of silver halide photographic emulsion
EP0699950A1 (en) 1994-08-26 1996-03-06 Eastman Kodak Company Ultrathin tabular grain emulsions with novel dopant management
JPH08122954A (en) 1994-08-30 1996-05-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide emulsion and photosensitive material using the emulsion
JPH08227117A (en) 1994-12-19 1996-09-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of photographic silver halide emulsion
JPH1043570A (en) 1996-08-06 1998-02-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Agitator
JPH1152507A (en) 1997-07-31 1999-02-26 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method for dispersing spectral sensitizer and dispersion obtained by the same
EP1139164A1 (en) 2000-03-27 2001-10-04 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide photographic material

Non-Patent Citations (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ARCH. PHARM., (WEINHEIM), vol. 320, 1987, pages 837
B.I. SHAPIRO, A.YU. USPENSKAYA, V.I. AVDEEVA: "Aggregation of Thiamonomethinecyanines in Solutions and Photographic Emulsion", IS&T'S 49TH ANNUAL CONFERENCE, FINAL PROGRAM AND PROCEEDINGS, MINNEAPOLIS, 1996, Springfield, VA, pages 99 - 100, XP001098755 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; DZYUBENKO, V. G. ET AL: "Photographic properties of carbocyanine derivatives of indolo(3,2-d)thiazoles", XP002210404, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 112:88000 *
G. DI MODICA, E. BARNI: "Colorante della classe delle cianine derivanti da tiazolo-chinoline", GAZZ. CHIM. ITAL., vol. 93, 1963, pages 679 - 686, XP001097854 *
J. AM. CHEM. SOC, vol. 76, 1954, pages 2447
J. HETEROCYCLIC CHEM., vol. 16, 1979, pages 1563
J. HETEROCYCLIC CHEM., vol. 20, 1983, pages 113
P. GLAFKIDES, CHIMIE ET PHYSIQUE PHOTOGRAPHIQUE, 1967
P.I. ABRAMENKO, T.K. PONOMAREVA: "Polymethine Dyes - Indolo[3,2-d]thiazole Derivatives", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), no. 12, 1972, pages 1455 - 1459, XP001098502 *
P.I. ABRAMENKO, V.G. ZHIRYAKOV: "Polymethine Dyes - Benzofuro[2,3-b]pyridine and Selenonaphtheno[2,3-b]pyridine Derivatives", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), 1972, pages 1460 - 1463, XP001098683 *
P.I. ABRAMENKO, V.G. ZHIRYAKOV: "Polymethine Dyes - Furo[2,3-b]-6-pyridine derivatives", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), 1975, pages 417 - 420, XP001098684 *
P.I. ABRAMENKO, V.G.ZHIRYAKOV, T.K. PONOMAREVA: "Polymethine Dyes - 4-substituted Furo[2,3-b]- and Selenopheno[2,3-b]pyridine derivatives", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), 1976, pages 52 - 56, XP001098685 *
P.I. ABRAMENKO, Z.G. ZHIRYAKOV: "Polymethine Dyes - 4- Methylbenzofuro- and 4-Methylbenzoselenopheno[2,3-b]pyridine Derivatives", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), 1976, pages 1125 - 1128, XP001098686 *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 011, no. 129 (P - 570) 23 April 1987 (1987-04-23) *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 011, no. 137 (P - 572) 2 May 1987 (1987-05-02) *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 011, no. 142 (P - 573) 9 May 1987 (1987-05-09) *
PATENT ABSTRACTS OF JAPAN vol. 011, no. 144 (P - 574) 12 May 1987 (1987-05-12) *
SYNTH. COMMUN., 1992, pages 2077
SYNTH. COMMUN., vol. 26, 1996, pages 1083
V.G. DZYUBENKO, L.D. PINKIN, P.I. ABRAMENKO: "Synthesis and Absorption Spectra of Polymethine Dyes - Derivatives of substituted Thieno- and Indolothiazoles", CHEM. HETEROCYCL. COMPD. (TRANSLATION OF KHIM. GETEROTSIKL. SOEDIN.), vol. 24, no. 9, 1988, pages 1059 - 1065, XP001098643 *
V.G. DZYUBENKO, P.I. ABRAMENKO: "Tri- and Tetraalkylindolo[3,2-d]thiazoles and their Derivatives", J. ORG. CHEM. USSR (TRANSLATION OF ZH. ORG. KHIM.), vol. 23, no. 1, 1987, pages 571 - 575, XP001095648 *
ZH. NAUCHN. PRIKL. FOTOGR. KINEMATOGR. (1989), 34(5), 327-34, XP001096011 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
ATE483182T1 (en) 2010-10-15
DE60143154D1 (en) 2010-11-11
EP1251395B1 (en) 2010-09-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7291449B2 (en) Silver halide photographic material and methine dye
US5478719A (en) Silver halide photographic material
EP0530511A1 (en) Silver halide photographic material
EP0615159B1 (en) Silver halide photographic material
EP1061411A1 (en) Silver halide photographic emulsion and photographic light-sensitive material using the same
US5491057A (en) Silver halide emulsion
EP1251395B1 (en) Silver halide photographic material containing a methine dye
EP0618492B1 (en) Silver halide color photographic material
US7598026B2 (en) Image forming method using a silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material, and silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material
US6762015B2 (en) Silver halide photographic emulsion and silver halide photographic material
US5449600A (en) Silver halide photographic material
JP2001343719A (en) Silver halide photosensitive material and image-forming method therefor
US6649336B2 (en) Silver halide photographic light-sensitive material
US5459025A (en) Methine compound and silver halide photographic material comprising same
JP2002023295A (en) Silver halide photosensitive material and methine dye
US5336594A (en) Silver halide photographic material
US5415980A (en) Image forming method
EP0625726A1 (en) Methine compound and silver halide photographic material comprising the same
US6090537A (en) Silver halide photographic material
JP2824886B2 (en) Silver halide photographic material
US5356769A (en) Methine compound and silver halide light-sensitive material containing the methine compound
US6150082A (en) Silver halide photographic material
JP4253428B2 (en) Silver halide photographic material
JP3088380B2 (en) Silver halide photosensitive material containing methine compound
JP2003172993A (en) Silver halide photographic sensitive material

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Free format text: AL;LT;LV;MK;RO;SI

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20030402

AKX Designation fees paid

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE TR

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20041105

RAP1 Party data changed (applicant data changed or rights of an application transferred)

Owner name: FUJIFILM CORPORATION

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20041105

GRAC Information related to communication of intention to grant a patent modified

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSCIGR1

GRAP Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1

RTI1 Title (correction)

Free format text: SILVER HALIDE PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL CONTAINING A METHINE DYE

GRAS Grant fee paid

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3

GRAA (expected) grant

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: B1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE TR

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: GB

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: EP

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: IE

Ref legal event code: FG4D

REF Corresponds to:

Ref document number: 60143154

Country of ref document: DE

Date of ref document: 20101111

Kind code of ref document: P

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: FI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

Ref country code: AT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: NL

Ref legal event code: VDEP

Effective date: 20100929

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: GR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20101230

Ref country code: SE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: NL

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

Ref country code: MC

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101031

Ref country code: IT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

Ref country code: PT

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20110131

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: CH

Ref legal event code: PL

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: BE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: ES

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20110109

Ref country code: LI

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101031

Ref country code: CH

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101031

PLBE No opposition filed within time limit

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT

GBPC Gb: european patent ceased through non-payment of renewal fee

Effective date: 20101229

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: DK

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

26N No opposition filed

Effective date: 20110630

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R097

Ref document number: 60143154

Country of ref document: DE

Effective date: 20110630

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: IE

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101023

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: GB

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101229

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: FR

Ref legal event code: ST

Effective date: 20111125

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: FR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101129

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: CY

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: LU

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES

Effective date: 20101023

PG25 Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: TR

Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT

Effective date: 20100929

PGFP Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo]

Ref country code: DE

Payment date: 20201013

Year of fee payment: 20

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: R071

Ref document number: 60143154

Country of ref document: DE